Woodshop Diaries

  • Shop
  • About
    • Work With Me
    • Frequently Asked Questions
  • DIY Projects
    • DIY Furniture Plans
      • DIY Bed Plans
      • DIY Dresser Plans
      • DIY Nightstand Plans
      • DIY Desk Plans
      • DIY TV Stand Plans
      • Coffee and Side Table Plans
      • Tables
      • Shelves and Bookcase Plans
      • DIY Storage Trunk Plans
      • DIY Bench Plans
      • DIY Storage Cabinet Plans
      • DIY Bathroom Vanity Plans
      • Kids Projects and Furniture
    • DIY Scrap Wood Projects
    • DIY Workshop Projects
    • DIY Home Decor Projects
  • Getting Started
    • Cabinet Building
    • Woodworking Basics
    • Furniture Finishing Tips
    • Tool Guides & Reviews
  • Blog
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Shop
  • About
    • Work With Me
    • Frequently Asked Questions
  • DIY Projects
    • DIY Furniture Plans
      • DIY Bed Plans
      • DIY Dresser Plans
      • DIY Nightstand Plans
      • DIY Desk Plans
      • DIY TV Stand Plans
      • Coffee and Side Table Plans
      • Tables
      • Shelves and Bookcase Plans
      • DIY Storage Trunk Plans
      • DIY Bench Plans
      • DIY Storage Cabinet Plans
      • DIY Bathroom Vanity Plans
      • Kids Projects and Furniture
    • DIY Scrap Wood Projects
    • DIY Workshop Projects
    • DIY Home Decor Projects
  • Getting Started
    • Cabinet Building
    • Woodworking Basics
    • Furniture Finishing Tips
    • Tool Guides & Reviews
  • Blog
search icon
Homepage link
  • Shop
  • About
    • Work With Me
    • Frequently Asked Questions
  • DIY Projects
    • DIY Furniture Plans
      • DIY Bed Plans
      • DIY Dresser Plans
      • DIY Nightstand Plans
      • DIY Desk Plans
      • DIY TV Stand Plans
      • Coffee and Side Table Plans
      • Tables
      • Shelves and Bookcase Plans
      • DIY Storage Trunk Plans
      • DIY Bench Plans
      • DIY Storage Cabinet Plans
      • DIY Bathroom Vanity Plans
      • Kids Projects and Furniture
    • DIY Scrap Wood Projects
    • DIY Workshop Projects
    • DIY Home Decor Projects
  • Getting Started
    • Cabinet Building
    • Woodworking Basics
    • Furniture Finishing Tips
    • Tool Guides & Reviews
  • Blog
×
Home

DIY Closet Tower with Drawers

April 24, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’ll show you how to build a large closet tower cabinet with drawers on the bottom and shelving on the top!

What I think is really neat about closet cabinets is that they are typically just really large boxes…nothing fancy at all. But what you put inside can be mixed and matched a thousand ways to customize it to fit YOUR specific needs.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing shoes in closet tower with drawers and shelving

For example, even though I added shelves at the top here, you could easily swap those for a hanging rod, or shoe cubbies instead.

But, no matter what you put in the top section, it’s hard to beat a good set of drawers here in the bottom for closet storage…especially when they come in a variety of sizes!

So if you could use a closet upgrade, let’s dive in and I’ll show you how to build this custom closet tower with drawers.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to know before building

I built this cabinet with drawers plus these hanging rod cabinet towers for my dad’s small walk in closet.

The hanging rod cabinets spanned across one wall and this cabinet fit into the opposite corner on an adjacent wall. If you’re looking to create full custom built ins for your closet space, these are all great options to mix and match.

The overall dimensions of this closet cabinet are approximately 16 ⅝″ deep x 36″ wide x 84″ tall.

Dimensional diagram of DIY closet tower with drawers on bottom and shelving on top

Helpful DIY Resources

If you’re new to building drawers, don’t worry! I’ll walk you through the entire drawer building process from start to finish in this drawer building series (with videos!). I’ve broken it down into four parts:

  • How to measure for and size drawer boxes
  • How to assemble a drawer box
  • How to install drawer slides
  • How to install drawer fronts

Prefer to print the whole series? Grab the Ultimate Drawer Building Guide which includes all four parts in a printable e-book you can take to the shop with you.

NOTE: The drawer boxes for this project were assembled using screws through the sides instead of my usual method of pocket holes. The reason is because the frames I used for drawer fronts would not have have covered the pocket holes. This is discussed in more detail in the video linked below.

You may find these additional resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How, when, and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig
  • How to apply edge banding

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

How to build a closet tower with drawers

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

Youtube thumbnail for DIY custom closet cabinets video

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable closet tower with drawers building plan available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw and Rip Cut Guide
  • Miter Saw
  • Pocket Hole Jig (standard & micro sized recommended, but micro is optional)
  • Brad nailer
  • Table saw or router (optional to cut drawer box dadoes–see notes)

Materials:

  • (2) 4’x8′ sheets ¾″ plywood
  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¼″ plywood
  • (6) 1x2x8 boards
  • (1) 1x3x8 board
  • (6) pair 16″ drawer slides
  • Wood Glue
  • 1 ¼” brad nails
  • 1 ¼” pocket hole screws (100 count box)
  • 1 lb box 1 ¼” wood screws
  • (2-3) 2 ½” long screws (to secure to wall studs)
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)
  • Drawer pulls and/or knobs

Not sure what type of wood to use for this project?

1x LUMBER: If painting, preprimed pine, spruce, or poplar are great budget friendly options. And if staining, usually, you want to use the same wood type as your plywood or something that will stain similarly so that they match. Check out this post to learn how to shop for and purchase lumber for your project.

PLYWOOD: I recommend using cabinet grade hardwood plywood (like birch, maple, oak, etc). Check out this post to learn how to choose the right plywood for your project.

This project was built with birch plywood and pine/spruce for the 1x material.

Step 1: Assemble Closet Tower Cabinet Box

The first step is assembling the main cabinet, which is, quite literally, just a big plywood rectangle with dividers.

So I cut two side panels, a top shelf and a middle shelf from one of my ¾″ plywood sheets and assembled the box using pocket holes and screws.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes to build cabinets

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling large closet cabinet box using pocket holes on workbench in workshop

You can find all the dimensions, cut diagrams and full cut lists in the plans here.

To save on lumber, instead of making a solid bottom shelf, I used some ¾″ plywood strips–one at the front and one at the back. Since drawers are going above them, it doesn’t matter that it’s not solid.

Then, because I was dividing up my smaller top drawers and my larger bottom drawers, I added two more strips and a divider panel into this bottom section just below the middle shelf.

Closet tower cabinet assembled with dividers for drawer boxes in bottom section

This essentially just gives me somewhere to mount my drawer slides…which we will cover in a later step.

Then, I cut 1x2s for the sides, top and middle and a 1×3 for the bottom and built a simple face frame to glue and nail onto the front of my cabinet.

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing face frame onto closet tower cabinet

FYI: I used Minwax Water Based Wood Stain in Driftwood on these pieces. I’ve found water based stain is easier to apply to individual pieces before assembling, so I stained each piece here before putting them together. Feel free to paint/stain/poly however you’d like.

Step 2: Install Drawer Slides

Because I added a face frame, I needed to add some spacer blocks on the sides of my cabinet to mount the drawer slides onto. These spacer blocks “push” the slides flush to the inside opening of my frame (otherwise, they can’t slide open).

So I glued and brad nailed scrap ¾″ plywood strips on each side of my cabinet where I wanted my slides.

Then I mounted 16″ drawer slides directly to these blocks.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer slides onto spacer closets in cabinet with face frame

I’m adding six drawers total: two large drawers on the bottom and four small drawers at the top. So I needed 6 pair of slides. Eight slides mount to the cabinet sides onto the spacer blocks, but four of them will mount directly to the center divider.

The slides on the divider do not need spacer blocks.

Check out this post for more information on installing drawer slides.

Drawer slides installed into bottom section of closet tower cabinet in workshop

Prefer to print? Grab the printable closet tower with drawer building plans here.

Step 3: Build and Install Drawer Boxes

Next, I cut down my second ¾″ plywood sheet to build my 6 drawer boxes from. The detailed cut diagrams and cut lists for these can be found in the plans.

I cut ¼″ dadoes into the sides of my drawer boxes to install ¼″ plywood bottom panels, but if you don’t have a table saw or a router to cut dadoes, that is OKAY!

Alternatively, you can simply glue and staple or nail the ¼″ plywood panels onto the bottom of the drawer box sides. Dadoes aren’t necessary.

Normally, I assemble my drawer boxes using pocket holes and screws on the front and back sides. The pocket holes are then covered by the drawer fronts…usually.

However, this time, I wasn’t installing solid drawer fronts, so the pocket holes wouldn’t be covered. So instead of pocket holes, I just screwed these boxes together using wood screws through the sides.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling drawer box on workbench with screws

That way the fronts stay “clean.”

Once the drawer boxes were together, I installed them into the cabinet. I found it easiest to remove the section of the drawer slide that mounts to the box and screw this directly to each side of each drawer.

Close up Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer slides onto side of drawer box

Then, I could slide these right into the cabinet. Notice there are three sizes of drawers: a deep drawer on the bottom, a medium drawer in the middle, and four small drawers at the top.

The variety of sizes is great for organization so you have a place to store large, bulky items, but also smaller accessories, too.

Shara Woodshop Diaries sliding drawers into cabinet on drawer slides

Step 4: Add Drawer Fronts

I mentioned that I didn’t opt for solid drawer fronts in this case. Instead, I assembled some simple frames from 1x2s.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling drawer front frames using 1x2s and pocket holes

I screwed these together using pocket holes and screws, one for each drawer box.

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding up 1x2 drawer front frame in workshop

Then, I laid my cabinet box (with drawer installed) on its back, arranged my fronts on my boxes, and carefully glued and brad nailed them in place.

Laying it on it’s back made it easy to ensure my gaps were even on all sides (⅛″ gaps) while gravity helped hold everything in place.

Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing drawer fronts onto drawer boxes in large DIY closet tower cabinet

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this project here.

Step 5: Install Closet Cabinet Shelving

Now the drawer section is finished and all that’s left is adding some functionality to the top. I mentioned earlier that this would be a great place for a hanging rod if you wanted to hang clothes here instead.

But because I had already make hanging rod cabinets for this closet, I added shelving to this section.

I used pocket holes and screws to install two long ¾″ plywood shelves to run the width of my cabinet opening.

TIP: I applied iron on edge banding to the fronts of these shelves to hide the plies. Learn how to cover plywood edges here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing shelving into tall closet cabinet

Dad has a problem with his stacks of clothes spilling onto each other and creating one big unorganized pile (and I have that same problem haha). He asked if I could add some dividers on the shelves.

So I cut some pieces of plywood to use as dividers. I just brad nailed these between my shelves.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing dividers into shelving at top of closet cabinet in workshop

On the bottom shelf, I divided it into three sections. But I’ll be honest, in hindsight, these three sections are a bit too narrow to be practical for clothes.

So in the middle shelf, I only used one divider to make two sections. I think this spacing was much better.

Depending on how you plan to use this section of the cabinet, feel free to modify and adjust your shelving, spacing, and dividers however makes sense for you.

Step 6: Finish & Install Closet Tower

After a few coats of Minwax Polycrylic to seal it, this cabinet was ready to install.

Well, actually, it did need some drawer pulls first. The inside opening of the top drawer fronts was pretty small. I had planned to put knobs in there, but was worried it might be hard for Dad and his big fingers in to get ahold of the knobs.

So I opted to install the drawer knobs on the top frame of the small drawers. Then I used these long handles for the bottom drawers.

Finished DIY closet tower with six various sized drawers at the bottom and shelving with dividers at the top

It’s a little “unusual” but I thought it turned out nice and will be more practical than a knob recessed deep into a small frame.

To install, I cut away the baseboard in the corner of Dad’s closet so this cabinet can butt directly up to the wall. Then I secured it to the wall studs with screws through the top back support.

It’s tough to get a good shot of it installed in such a tight space, but here’s Dad’s closet complete with this cabinet on the left and the hanging rod closet towers on the right.

Walk in closet with built in wooden cabinets

Dad said it feels like he’s walking into a fancy men’s clothing store with these nice wood cabinets lining the wall haha! It’s definitely an improvement over the old wire shelving he had in here.

If you’re ready to build your own simple custom closet tower cabinets, be sure to grab the printable building plans here.

Looking for more closet cabinet ideas?

Enjoyed this build, but looking for more custom closet ideas? I’ve got you covered! Click on the image(s) below to learn how to build each project:

Simple DIY Closet Towers
DIY Modular Closet
Built In Closet Cabinets
How to Build Your Own Stand Alone DIY Closet Cabinets With Clothes rod and adjustable shelves and even a shoe rack!
DIY Freestanding Closet Cabinets
DIY Closet System

If you enjoyed this post, be sure to save it for later by pinning or sharing to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing dimensional diagram at top and finished closet tower with drawers on bottom

Until next time, friend, happy building!

DIY Closet Tower Cabinets

April 24, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build your own custom closet tower cabinets with hanging rods and adjustable shelves!

Custom closets can be PRICEY. What I always find fascinating, though, is that most of those expensive cabinets are just huge boxes…nothing super fancy.

Shara Woodshop Diaries hanging shirt on DIy wooden closet tower cabinet with hanging rods

And many of the flat pack self-assembled options (looking at you, IKEA), may be slightly cheaper than fully custom (but still a pretty penny), but they aren’t even made of wood. It’s particle board or MDF.

Building your own DIY closet tower cabinets can not only save you thousands, but will also get you better quality (actual wood!) and custom sizing. PLUS, they’re really pretty quick and simple to make and don’t require a lot of tools.

Like I said…they’re just big boxes!

So if you’re ready to upgrade your closet on a budget, I’ll show you how to make these modular closet tower cabinets with hanging rods and adjustable shelves. These are great pieces to mix and match to fit your space.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to know before building

I built these closet towers for my dad’s small walk in closet. I made him two hanging rod cabinets and a narrow adjustable shelf cabinet to go between them (which was perfect for shoes!).

These three cabinets spanned along the back wall of dad’s closet, which was about 76″ wide.

So I built them with an overall width (when placed side by side) of just under 76″ to give us some wiggle room when installing. We can cover any gaps later with trim if needed.

That said, the overall dimensions of these closet towers are 16 ⅝″ deep x 75 ⅜″ wide x 84″ tall.

Closet tower cabinets overall dimensional diagram

Since they are in three separate pieces, it’s easy to mix and match and adjust the sizing as needed to fit your space.

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How, when, and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig
  • How to apply edge banding
  • How to add adjustable shelves

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

How to build closet tower cabinets

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

Youtube thumbnail for DIY custom closet cabinets video

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable closet tower building plans available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw and Rip Cut Guide
  • Miter Saw
  • Pocket Hole Jig (standard & micro sized recommended, but micro is optional)
  • Brad nailer
  • Shelf Pin Jig

Materials:

  • (3) 4’x8′ sheets ¾″ plywood
  • (2) 6′ long 1 ¼” diameter dowel rod (or closet rod)
  • (8) 1x2x8 boards
  • (3) 1x3x8 boards
  • Shelf Pins
  • Wood Glue
  • 1 ¼” brad nails
  • 1 ¼” pocket hole screws (100 count box)
  • 1 lb box 2 ½” long screws
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)

Not sure what type of wood to use for this project?

1x LUMBER: If painting, preprimed pine, spruce, or poplar are great budget friendly options. And if staining, usually, you want to use the same wood type as your plywood or something that will stain similarly so that they match. Check out this post to learn how to shop for and purchase lumber for your project.

PLYWOOD: I recommend using cabinet grade hardwood plywood (like birch, maple, oak, etc). Check out this post to learn how to choose the right plywood for your project.

This project was built with birch plywood and pine/spruce for the 1x material.

Step 1: Assemble Hanging Rod Cabinets

I mentioned this in the video above, but to make the most use of my ¾″ plywood sheets, I ripped them into three strips 15 ⅞″ wide. I can use two strips for my side panels and the third strips for the shelves.

That way, I can make one full cabinet from one full sheet (which makes it easy to adjust the material list for however many cabinets you’d like).

RELATED: How to cut plywood sheets

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting plywood on workbench with circular saw

The ceilings in dad’s closet were 8′ tall, so I cut my two side panels to 7′ long. That way, dad still has room to store stuff on top of the cabinets, but also, we have room to get them inside and tilted upright to install.

Then I cut three shelves from my third plywood strip and assembled a large cabinet box like you see below using pocket holes and screws.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes in DIY cabinets

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling large closet cabinet box on workbench with pocket holes. Cabinet has three shelves and two back support strips

You’ll see that I also added two strips under the top and middle shelves at the back. These will allow me to screw them to the wall when we install.

I repeated to make two of these cabinets just alike.

FYI: I used Minwax Water Based Wood Stain in Driftwood on these pieces. I’ve found water based stain is easier to apply to individual pieces before assembling, so I stained each piece here before putting them together. Feel free to paint/stain/poly however you’d like.

Shara Woodshop Diaries looking at two large identical closet cabinets assembled in workshop

Prefer to print? Grab the printable closet tower building plans here.

Step 2: Install Face Frames

Next, I added face frames onto the fronts of my two cabinet boxes. I used 1x2s for the sides, top and middle and a 1×3 at the bottom and assembled my frame with pocket holes and screws.

RELATED: Understanding lumber sizing

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling large closet tower face frame with pocket holes

TIP: A standard size pocket hole jig can work if you’re careful, but I recommend using a Kreg Micro Jig for these face frame pieces with pan head pocket hole screws. The smaller holes and screws are less likely to cause splits.

Learn how, when, and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig here.

Then I glued and nailed these frames onto the fronts of each cabinet.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing and nailing face frame onto front of cabinet box on workshop floor

Step 3: Add Hanging Rods

Now the boxes are built (see, I told you they were simple!), and all that’s left is adding the rods for hanging clothes. I opted for a 1 ¼″ diameter dowel rod for hanging, so I cut two dowels the width of my cabinet opening.

Then, I took a hanger and used it to figure out where was best to mount the rods and marked this location on each side of the cabinet in both the top and bottom sections.

Shara Woodshop Diaries marking where to hang dowel rod in closet tower cabinet

Next, I predrilled pilot holes through my cabinet sides at these marks. This made it easy to drive 2 ½″ screws through these holes and into the center of my dowel rods.

Close up of driving screw through cabinet box side to secure hanging rods in closet tower

Each section is ABOUT 40″ tall, which is ideal for shirts pants, and every day clothing. For longer pieces like dresses, you may consider adjusting the middle shelf up or down or removing it altogether to give you more hanging room.

Step 4: Assemble Adjustable Shelf Closet Cabinet

Now Dad had places to hang his clothes, but he also needed somewhere to put his shoes.

So I cut another sheet of ¾″ plywood to build a tall, skinny cabinet box (very similar to my hanging rod cabinets, just without a middle shelf) using pocket holes and screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing cabinet box bottom panel on workbench with pocket holes

I wanted this cabinet to have adjustable shelves so that dad could add as many shelves as needed and space them out however he’d like for dress shoes, boots, sneakers, etc.

So, I used a shelf pin jig to drill shelf pin holes up each side of the cabinet box.

RELATED: How to use a shelf pin jig

Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling shelf pin holes along cabinet sides

Then, just like the previous cabinet box, I built and nailed a face frame on the front of this cabinet as well.

Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing face frame onto front of tall skinny cabinet box for closet tower

Grab the full cut list, cut diagrams, and step by step instructions to build your own in the plans here.

I didn’t forget! I’ll add the adjustable shelves in just a minute!

Step 5: Install Closet Tower Cabinets

Because it was a tight fit to get a good picture in dad’s closet, I’ll show you a diagram that better explains how we installed these (you can also check out the video here).

These cabinets need to be installed directly to the wall, so first, we cut away the baseboard in the closet where they were going.

Then we could place them against the wall side by side. I secured the boxes together using 2 ½″ screws through the face frames (shown in pink).

Closet tower diagram showing installation

Then, I secured the boxes to the wall studs with 2 ½″ screws through the back supports (shown in blue).

And finally, I cut six pieces of ¾″ plywood for my adjustable shelves, applied edge banding to the front, and installed these into the middle cabinet with shelf pins.

RELATED: How to apply edge banding to hide plywood edges

Completed DIY built in closet cabinets with hanging rods and adjustable shoe shelf

Dad said it feels like he’s walking into a fancy men’s clothing store with these nice wood cabinets lining the wall haha! It’s definitely an improvement over the old wire shelving he had in here.

Oh…and if you’re interested in that cabinet on the left, you can see how to build it in this post. It’s another great closet cabinet addition!

I know it’s hard to capture it fully in a tight space, so here’s a better look at just the cabinets. So simple, but so practical!

DIY closet tower cabinets with hanging rods on each side and adjustable shoe shelf in the middle

If you’re ready to build your own simple custom closet tower cabinets, be sure to grab the printable building plans here.

Looking for more closet cabinet ideas?

Enjoyed this build, but looking for more custom closet ideas? I’ve got you covered! Click on the image(s) below to learn how to build each project:

DIY Closet Tower with Drawers
DIY Modular Closet
DIY Closet System
Built In Closet Cabinets
How to Build Your Own Stand Alone DIY Closet Cabinets With Clothes rod and adjustable shelves and even a shoe rack!
DIY Freestanding Closet Cabinets

If you enjoyed this post, be sure to save it for later by pinning or sharing to your favorite social channel!

Closet tower Pinterest collage image showing dimensional diagram at top and completed DIY closet tower cabinets at bottom

Until next time, friend, happy building!

How to Build an Arched Cabinet

April 9, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m showing you how to build a DIY arched cabinet with double doors!

Arched cabinets and shelves are so trendy right now, but all the affordable ones are super poor quality…whomp whomp…

They’re typically made from particle board which looks and feels, well…cheap. And they fall apart so quickly (just read the reviews). You really do get what you pay for.

But, it’s tough to spend thousands of dollars on a REAL WOOD arched cabinet. So I built one myself for just under $300 in lumber.

Shara Woodshop Diaries opening right door of DIY arched cabinet project showing shelving inside

This project was a bit of a challenge, but it turned out AMAZING and it was so rewarding to step back and say “I BUILT THAT!”

It looks and feels ten times nicer than those store bought fake wood ones and if you want to build one of your own, I’ve got all the details below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to know before building a curved top cabinet

Full transparency, this is not what I would consider a beginner level DIY project. It uses simple joinery like pocket holes and dowels so no advanced joinery is needed.

But, with the curves and the notched out legs, it can be a bit of a challenge and attention to detail is a must.

I mentioned this in the video linked below, but there are several parts of this project that I would do differently if I built this again. So I updated the printable plans to match what I SHOULD have done vs exactly what’s shown in the video.

Overall Dimensions

The overall dimensions of this arched cabinet ended up being about 19″ deep x 31 ½″ wide x 71 ¾″ tall including the legs. The cabinet part is 17 ½″ x 30″ x 60″.

Overall dimensional diagram of arched cabinet with double doors

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How, when, and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig
  • How to use a router
  • How to apply edge banding
  • How to use a dowel jig

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

How to build an Arched Cabinet

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

arched cabinet build video youtube thumbnail

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable arched cabinet building plans available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw and Plywood Cutting Guides (Kreg Rip Cut & AccuCut)
  • Miter Saw
  • Pocket Hole Jig (standard size)
  • Micro Pocket Hole Jig
  • Dowel Jig (⅜″ recommended)
  • Router
  • Router Circle Cutting Guide with ¼″ straight bit (optional, but recommended)
  • ⅜” Rabbeting Router Bit
  • Flush Cut Router Bit
  • Stapler
  • Jig Saw

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¾″ plywood
  • (2) 4’x8′ sheets ¼″ plywood
  • (8) 1x2x8′ boards
  • (1) 1x8x10′ board
  • (1) ½” x 1 ½″ x 8′ board
  • (1) ¼” x 1 ½″ x 6′ board
  • 1 ¼” washer head pocket hole screws (100 count box)
  • 1 ¼” pan head pocket hole screws (100 count box)
  • 1″ pan head pocket hole screws (100 count box)
  • (20) ⅜″ x 1 ½″ dowel pins
  • ⅝” long staples
  • Wood glue
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)
  • (4-6) Large Cabinet Butt Hinges
  • Knobs/Pulls for Doors
  • Magnetic catches (optional)

Not sure what type of wood to use for this project?

1x LUMBER & TRIM: If painting, preprimed pine, spruce, or poplar are great budget friendly options. And if staining, usually, you want to use the same wood type as your plywood or something that will stain similarly so that they match. Check out this post to learn how to shop for and purchase lumber for your project.

PLYWOOD: I recommend using cabinet grade hardwood plywood (like birch, maple, oak, etc). Check out this post to learn how to choose the right plywood for your project.

This project was built with red oak 1x lumber and red oak plywood.

Step 1: Assemble the Curved Frame

This project starts out a little weird, so hang with me. I promise it will make more sense as we go along.

First, I needed to cut two wooden rings, one slightly smaller than the other. So, I glued up a hexagon “ring” from 1x6s using dowels.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing up hexagon frame on workbench

In hindsight, I would NOT glue up a hexagon if I were to do this again. Instead, I’d use a 1×8 board, miter the ends 45 degrees and glue up a large square. This is just much easier to glue up and clamp tight than a hexagon was.

After the glue dried, I used a trim router with this trim router circle guide to help me cut my two rings.

I cut my first circle with a 30″ outside diameter, then moved in to cut out the large ring so that it was exactly 1 ½″ thick.

Shara Woodshop Diaries using router and circle cutting jig to cut wooden rings

Then, I repeated to cut a second smaller ring exactly 1 ½″ thick. The larger ring will be for the front and back cabinet frames and the smaller one will be for the doors later. So I set the smaller ring aside for now.

I cut the larger ring in half to give me two arches. Then, I cut 1x2s and assembled two identical frames with these arches at the top.

Arched top cabinet face frame glued up leaning against wall

These frames were glued up with dowels and were a bit tricky to clamp, but I share some helpful tips in the video.

Once the glue was dry on the two frames, I cut some ½″ x 1 ½″ strips and attached them between the two frames around the arch using pocket holes and screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling arched cabinet frame supports around top with pocket holes

These pieces were small and delicate, so I recommend using the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig with small pan head screws to avoid splits.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable arched cabinet building plans here.

Step 2: Build the Arched Cabinet Box

Now the arched frame is together, but I needed to cover the sides to make it a box. Again, this seems a little weird, but hang with me!

I ripped a strip of ¼″ plywood to fit between my arched frames from step 1. Then I marked every ½″ along the full 96″ length…it was a lot of marks.

This piece needs to bend over the top of my cabinet, so I set my circular saw cut depth to about ⅛″ (so it would cut about halfway through this panel) and cut along every line.

Strip of ¼" plywood with ⅛" deep kerf cuts every ½" so it bends

If you’re wondering, that took about an hour straight of cutting. But it was so worth it because this piece was perfectly bendy after all those cuts. This is called “kerf bending” and it works great for curved projects.

FYI: I tried cutting different intervals on some scrap pieces and anything more than ½″ would bend okay, but it wouldn’t bend smooth. You could feel every cut and it was very segmented. ½″ spacing seemed to be where the bend started to look and feel really smooth.

The problem is that now I have a pretty side and a side with a thousand (well, more like 190 ish) cuts. But that’s okay…I have a plan.

I cut a piece from this kerfed panel to wrap over the top of my frame and stapled it cut side up to the supports.

Shara Woodshop Diaries stapling kerf cut plywood panel around curved top of cabinet frame

Then, I cut a second piece from my kerfed strip to wrap over the top. I applied a liberal amount of wood glue to the cut side, then smoothed and clamped this piece over the top.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing top of arched cabinet onto frame

Now the cut sides are hidden and once the glue dries, this piece gets a lot more rigid. But, it’s important that these pieces are tightly together and don’t have large air bubbles or voids between them while the glue dries.

Once the top was on, I cut ¾″ plywood pieces for the sides and bottom and installed these between my front and back frames using pocket holes and screws.

Arched cabinet box assembled without back

This part was a bit more straightforward so I won’t go into too much detail here. Check out the printable plans for all the details, dimensions and cut diagrams for this project.

Step 3: Add Back, Shelves & Trim

For the back, I debated back and forth on whether I should recess the back panel into the frame or just staple it over the opening.

Ultimately, I decided to use a router and a rabbeting bit to route a groove along the back, inside edge of the frame. Then I cut a piece of ¼″ plywood to fit inside and stapled it on.

Shara Woodshop Diaries stapling curved back panel onto arched cabinet box

But, while routing, I hit a couple of the pocket hole screws on the bottom panel. So, in hindsight, I would either install the back panel BEFORE the bottom panel OR just staple the back panel over the cabinet and not recess it.

Then, I cut three shelves and installed these into the arched cabinet using pocket holes and screws.

I used these stationary shelves to hide the pocket holes on my side panels so that none of them are visible in the finished project.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing shelves into arched cabinet using pocket holes and screws

Then, to finish up the cabinet portion of the project, I cut some ¼″ thick trim pieces and glued them over the joint where the arch meets the straight sides.

Close up of gluing and taping trim pieces onto cabinet sides

I also added a piece at the bottom of each side to help balance it out. And now the arched cabinet box is assembled, but I still needed to add the doors and legs.

Step 4: Attach Modern Legs

For my legs, I wanted to use 2x2s, but I needed to notch out a section for them to kind of “wrap around” the cabinet corners. That way, the cabinet could rest in the notch.

To do this, I cut my 2x2s to length, then used a table saw to cut halfway down on two sides. Then I could use an oscillating saw to cut it square at the corners. And this worked…but I wouldn’t do that again.

2x2 board with large notch to be used as legs on cabinet box

Instead, I should have cut two 1x2s for each leg and used a jig saw to cut a notch out of the corner of one of them. Then I could glue them together to make the same thing as my 2x2s…just much easier.

Hindsight always makes everything clearer. Too bad it’s always too late ha!

Once I had my four legs notched, I carefully glued and clamped them around the corners of my cabinet.

Notched legs glued and clamped around corners of arched cabinet box with shelves

I didn’t add any nails or screws here, but you could if you’d like. The glue should hold well, but I made sure to apply plenty of it.

Prefer to print? Printable plans for this arched cabinet project can be found here.

Step 5: Assemble and Attach Arched Cabinet Doors

For the doors, I cut 1x2s for the frame. But remember that smaller wooden ring from step 1? I cut it to use for the arch along the top of my doors.

Its a bit tricky to size, so I clamped my door frames like you see below, placed it on the ring, aligned the corners, then marked where to cut.

Shara Woodshop Diaries marking where to cut wooden circle to make arched door frames

Then, I assembled my door frames using pocket holes and screws.

TIP: A standard size pocket hole jig can work if you’re careful, but I recommend using a Kreg Micro Jig for these door frame pieces with pan head pocket hole screws. The smaller holes and screws are less likely to cause splits.

Learn how, when, and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling arched door frame using pocket holes and screws on workbench

Once the frames were assembled, I glued ¼″ plywood panels onto the back side, then used a flush cut bit in my router to trim all the edges nice and flush.

If you don’t have a flush cut bit and/or router, you could also trim and sand the edges flush instead.

Close up using router to flush cut plywood to the edge of arched door frame

After test fitting the doors, I decided to go ahead and finish the doors and the cabinet separately before installing them.

I stained this project in Minwax Weathered Oak wood stain and sealed it with a few coats of Minwax Polycrylic.

Then, I installed the doors using these large antique style cabinet hinges.

Close up of large cabinet butt hinges used to hand arched cabinet doors

These hinges worked great and fit the style of the cabinet really well. But, unlike concealed hinges, these butt hinges didn’t have any adjustment options. So if your doors are a little off, you may have to add some small shims here or there.

TIP: It is a bit tricky to get these doors to fit perfectly (mine are close, but not perfect!), So if you need to trim or sand a little here and there to get them to fit, that’s okay!

Once the doors were on, I added some large door pulls and magnetic catches at the top and bottom to help hold the doors nice and flat when closed.

Completed DIY arched cabinet with double doors and modern legs made from red oak

I am absolutely thrilled with how this project turned out. The curves made it challenging, but it was so much fun to work through the process. It really turned out to be a beautiful piece.

Arched cabinet with doors open to reveal shelves inside

Now the question is…where should I put it?! I think it would be great in several places, so I’ll have to make a decision soon.

But in the meantime, I hope this inspired you to tackle your own DIY arched cabinet build!

If so, don’t forget to check out the printable plans here!

Looking for more unique storage cabinet ideas?

Enjoyed this build, but looking for more unique storage ideas? I’ve got you covered! Click on the image(s) below to learn how to build each project:

Bookcase with Pocket Doors
DIY Coat Storage Cabinet
How to Build a Larder Cabinet
Arched Door Console Cabinet
DIY Vanity with Off Center Sink
DIY Display Cabinet
DIY Display Console Cabinet

If you enjoyed this post, be sure to save it for later by pinning or sharing to your favorite social channel!

Arched cabinet pinterest collage image showing dimensional diagram at top and Shara with Arched cabinet at bottom

Until next time, friend, happy building!

DIY Small Rustic Bookcase

March 28, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’ll show you how to build a small, rustic style bookcase with just a few basic tools!

You’ve heard it said that you can never had enough storage. I feel like the same applies to bookshelves, too.

Shara Woodshop Diaries standing next to DIY rustic style small bookshelf stained in aged oak

A small (or big!) shelf is a practical addition to any room and can add extra storage and/or a place to display your favorite keepsakes and décor. And…books, of course.

This small, freestanding book case is the perfect size for use in a bathroom for towels, a kid’s room for books and toys, or a kitchen for cookbooks, snack storage, and more.

Plus, it’s an excellent weekend woodworking project (even for beginners!). So if you’re ready to get building, I’ll show you how to make your own below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This bookshelf is designed to be freestanding, so I gave it legs at the corners instead of it going all the way to the floor.

For these legs, I used 2×2 lumber, and for the trim and framing pieces, I used 1x2s. To make things “rustic,” I opted to use pine boards. You can absolutely buy precut 2x2s, but I like to make my own using this method.

For the rest of the build, I kept it simple by using plywood, BUT if you wanted to make this from solid pine boards instead (like 1x pine), you certainly could!

2x2 and plywood lumber to build bookcase laid out on workbench

I had scrap plywood already around, but I think pine would have been a really great alternative to give this an even more rustic feel.

If using plywood, a cabinet grade plywood is the best option for a smooth, sturdy shelf.

RELATED: How to choose plywood for your projects

Overall Dimensions

The overall dimensions of this small rustic bookshelf are approximately 14″ deep x 27 ½″ wide x 48″ tall.

Overall dimensional diagram of DIY small bookcase project with three shelves

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to apply edge banding
  • 5 Tips for Professional Looking DIYs

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

How to Build a small book shelf

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

3 ways to build a bookshelf YouTube video thumbnail

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable bookshelf building plans available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw and plywood cutting guide
  • Miter Saw
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Brad nailer

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¾″ plywood
  • (1) 2’x4′ sheet ¼″ plywood
  • (2) 2x2x8′ boards
  • (2) 1x2x8′ boards
  • 1 ¼” pocket hole screws (100 count box)
  • (2) 1 ¼″ wood screws
  • (2) 2″ wood screws
  • 1 ¼” long brad or finish nails
  • Wood glue
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)

Step 1: Assemble Side Panels

First, I built the two sides of my bookcase. So I cut four 2x2s to about the height I wanted my shelf. One of these will go on each corner.

For the front two, I took a minute to taper the inside corners just to add a little detail, but that’s totally optional.

To taper, simply adjust the miter saw to 45-50 degrees (I went with 50, but if your saw only goes to 45, that’s fine!), and trim off just the corner of one end.

Close up of 2x2s at miter saw with tapered ends

Then, I cut two ¾″ plywood side panels to run between them. I had wanted to attach the plywood side panel to each leg using wood glue and dowels, but due to time restraints, I used pocket holes.

Pocket holes work great here, but the problem is they’re visible on the inside of the shelf.

So, I opted to strategically lay out and place my pocket holes on the side panels so that my stationary shelves will cover them in a later step. I carefully marked out my pocket hole locations and drilled my pocket holes.

RELATED: How to use a pocket hole jig

Shara Woodshop Diaries laying out pocket hole locations on plywood panel

Then, I secured this piece between two of my 2×2 legs. Notice how the pocket holes are spaced here. You can find all the dimensions used here in the printable plans.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing plywood side panel to 2x2 boards to make sides of bookshelf

I built two of these, one for each side of the bookshelf. And I made sure to keep my tapered legs on the front side of each.

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding two DIY small bookcase side panels in workshop

Step 2: Build Bookshelf Frame

Next, I could attach these two sides together to make the bookshelf frame. For this, I cut three 1×2 pieces and a plywood bottom shelf.

I drilled pocket holes into the ends of all of these pieces and attached them between the sides from step 1.

Two 1x2s go at the top (one at the front, one at the back), one goes at the bottom (in the front), and the bottom shelf slides in right behind the bottom support like you see below.

Shara Woodshop Diaries attaching bottom shelf of small bookcase using pocket holes on workbench

And now this bookshelf is starting to take shape and actually look like a bookshelf!

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing small bookcase frame on workshop floor

Step 3: Attach Back panel

For the back panel, I used ¼″ plywood. Now, in the video, I show you how you can simply staple (or nail or screw) the back panel over the back side of the bookshelf.

But, I also show you how you can route a rabbet out of the backside to recess the back panel.

Either method works fine here, so you can pick which you’d rather. Personally, I am not a big fan of the router, so I’d rather just staple on the back panel.

DIY small bookcase with plywood back panel installed

Recessing the back panel kind of hides it so that you don’t see the edges from the sides, but on a piece like this, if you don’t run your back panel all the way to the edge of the sides, it’s not really noticeable anyway.

So I suggest cutting it a bit narrower than the overall shelf width and tacking it on the back.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable plans with details, dimensions and cut diagrams here.

Step 4: Add Top

Now this was ready for a top, so I cut a piece of plywood to fit over the top with about ¾″ overhang on the sides and front.

Before attaching it, I applied edge banding to the front and sides to cover the plies.

Then, I centered it on the shelf and secured it with screws through the top supports.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing top panel of bookshelf using screws

TIP: For an even more rustic feel, you could swap the plywood on the top panel and glue up a solid wood top from pine boards.

Just to dress the sides up a bit, I glued and nailed some 1×2 trim at the top and the bottom of both sides. That way the sides kind of “match” the framing on the front.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing 1x2 pieces to trim sides of bookshelf

Step 5: Install Shelves

I mentioned in step 1 that I kind of wish I’d assembled my sides using dowels instead of pocket holes.

The reason for this is because I usually like to add adjustable shelves vs stationary shelves to my projects.

But, since I used pocket holes on the sides, if I added adjustable shelves here, you’d see the visible pocket holes.

So I opted to add two stationary shelves here instead and strategically placed them to cover the pocket holes on each side.

Two stationary shelves installed into bookcase with pocket holes on workbench

You can absolutely add adjustable shelves here if you don’t mind seeing the pocket holes…or if you wanted to plug them.

But I think if you wanted to add adjustable shelves here, using dowels in step 1 would be the best option.

After my stationary shelves were installed, I gave this piece a coat of Minwax Water Based Semi-Transparent Wood Stain in Aged Oak.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood stain to DIY small bookshelf

And this adorable little shelf was ready for books, trinkets, and all the essentials you need on a well rounded bookshelf 🙂

Completed wooden DIY small bookcase with three stationary shelves stained brown

If you’d like to build your own, grab the printable building plans for this small rustic bookshelf here.

Looking for more simple DIY book shelf ideas?

If you enjoyed this project, but are still looking for more bookshelf ideas, I’ve got you covered! Click on the image(s) below to see how to build each of these easy DIY bookshelves:

DIY Geometric Bookshelf
DIY Rotating Bookshelf
Modern Plywood Shelf
One Sheet Plywood Bookshelf
Easy DIY Shelf with Baskets

Don’t forget to save this project for later by pinning it or sharing to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing dimensional diagram of bookshelf at top and Shara with completed small bookcase at bottom with text "how to build a small rustic shelf"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

How to Build a Bookshelf

March 27, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m showing you how to build a simple, traditional bookcase with trim!

A bookcase is one of the best practical, simple, but classic pieces to DIY. You don’t need a lot of tools, experience, or material to build one.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing book on completed DIY bookshelf painted blue

It’s not a time consuming project and you can dress it up and customize it to be as simple or as fancy as you’d like!

If you’re thinking about building a bookcase (or two…you can put several together to make a wall of shelves!), I’ll walk you through it step by step below.

*This post contains affiliate links. Please see website policies.

What to know before building

Building a basic bookshelf is an excellent beginner woodworking project. While somewhat large in size (I guess it depends on what you consider large ha!), it’s easy to assemble in just a few steps and with a few common tools.

And for an even simpler project, you can skip adding the additional trim and face frame.

In this YouTube video, I share how to build a bookcase three different ways and the first way is the most basic option. It’s simply a plywood box with shelves:

Simple DIY plywood bookcase with adjustable shelves

The second bookshelf…the one I’m sharing in this post…is literally this exact bookcase, but with additional trim added on the sides and front. So I’ll show you how to build both below.

You can stop after step 2 to make the shelf shown above.

What kind of wood should you build a bookcase with?

If you know me, you know I love building with plywood. So I built this bookshelf using ¾″ plywood for the body and shelves and ¼″ plywood for the back.

Sheet of birch plywood leaned against workbench in workshop

Bookcase depth can vary, but you commonly find bookcases roughly 12″ deep. So, if you wanted to use solid wood instead of plywood, 1×12 boards are a great option since they’re 11 ¼″ wide.

Learn more about understanding lumber sizing here.

1x whitewood boards stacked on workbench

I prefer using cabinet grade plywood (like birch, maple, oak) for my bookcases because it’s sometimes challenging to find 1x12s that aren’t twisted or warped. But if you can find some flat ones, they may be a bit cheaper than using plywood.

RELATED: How to choose plywood for your projects

For the trim pieces, if painting, primed pine, whitewood, and poplar are good choices. And if staining, consider using the same type of wood for the trim that you use for the plywood, or something that will stain similarly so that it blends well once finished.

Overall Dimensions

The overall dimensions of this bookshelf are 12 ½″ deep x 30″ wide x 69″ tall.

Overall dimensional diagram of bookcase with trim on sides, top and bottom

NOTE: These dimensions do not include the additional decorative trim molding added to the top and bottom.

You can customize this trim, so the dimensions will vary based on what type and size of decorative trim is used (base cap, crown, base molding).

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to apply edge banding
  • 5 Tips for Professional Looking DIYs

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

How to build a bookshelf

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

YouTube thumbnail for 3 ways to build a bookcase video

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable bookshelf building plans available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw
  • Rip Cut Cutting Guide (optional)
  • Miter Saw
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Shelf Pin Jig
  • Brad nailer

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¾″ plywood
  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¼″ plywood
  • (4) 1x2x8′ boards
  • (2) 1x3x8′ boards
  • (1) 1x6x8′ board
  • (1) 8′ piece 3 ¼″ tall baseboard molding
  • (1) 8′ piece base cap or crown molding (to trim the top)
  • 1 ¼” pocket hole screws (100 count box)
  • 1 ¼” long brad or finish nails
  • Wood glue
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)
  • Shelf Pins

Step 1: Assemble the Bookcase Body

To kick this project off, I ripped two strips off my ¾″ plywood sheet to build by bookshelf body. If you’re using 1x12s, you can skip the plywood ripping.

A plywood sheet is 8′ long, and I cut a piece 27″ long from each of these two strips. One will be for the top and one for the bottom of the shelf.

I used the remaining longer pieces from each strip for the bookshelf sides. So I had two long sides and two short top and bottom pieces.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing plywood pieces on workbench to build bookshelf

If you aren’t planning to add additional trim to the shelf, I recommend applying edge banding to the front edges of these pieces to hide the plies. This isn’t NECESSARY, but it does look a lot cleaner.

RELATED: How to apply iron on edge banding

Then, I drilled pocket holes into the ends of my short pieces and assembled a large box with pocket hole screws. Learn how to assemble with pocket holes here.

Notice that the bottom shelf is installed a few inches up from the bottom of each side!

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling bookcase body on workbench using pocket hole screws

Now that the box was together, I cut a piece of ¼″ plywood to fit and stapled it onto the back side (you can staple, brad nail or screw this on). This really helps to make the large box more rigid.

Shara Woodshop Diaries stapling back panel onto bookcase on workshop floor

Quick note: If you’re not adding the additional trim and face frame to your shelf, cut a strip of plywood to go underneath the bottom shelf to act as a toe kick.

You can see this in the image below. It’s a simple strip of ¾″ plywood cut to fit, installed with pocket hole screws and inset from the front of the shelf about 1 ½″.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable bookshelf building plans here.

Step 2: Install Shelves

Shelves can be either stationary or adjustable. I personally prefer adjustable shelves (I’m indecisive), but on tall projects like this shelf, tall pantries, or large cabinets, adding a stationary shelf somewhere between the top and bottom helps keep the sides from bowing over a large span.

The stationary shelf doesn’t always have to be in the center–it can be closer toward the top or the bottom. But in this case, it made sense to just put it in the middle.

So I cut a ¾″ plywood shelf and installed it between my side panels in the middle of my shelf using pocket hole screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing stationary shelf in middle of bookcase using pocket hole screws

TIP: This stationary shelf won’t be covered by trim later, so I recommend edge banding the front edge since it will be exposed in the finished project.

Then, I drilled shelf pin holes above and below this shelf so I could make the rest of my shelves adjustable.

Close up of drilling shelf pin holes for adjustable shelves in bookcase

You can learn how to use a shelf pin jig here to add adjustable shelves to any project.

If you’re not familiar, shelf pin holes allow you to place your shelves wherever you’d like using shelf pins.

After my holes were drilled, I cut two more plywood shelves to place inside.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing adjustable shelves into bookcase on shelf pins

If you don’t want to add the extra trim, you can stop here and finish your new bookcase with paint or stain as desired.

Step 3: Add Side Trim

To dress up the sides, I added a few 1x pieces to trim it out.

First, I glued and nailed 1x2s to run vertically along the front and back edges. The 1×2 on the back also covers the back panel plywood edge.

Close up of brad nailing 1x2 trim onto sides of DIY bookshelf

Then, I cut to fit three pieces to run between them. I cut a 1×3 to go at the top, a 1×2 in the middle and a 1×6 at the bottom.

In case you’re wondering…The reason for the thicker pieces at the top and bottom is to allow more room to add decorative moldings later.

Bookcase laid on its back on workshop floor with prime pine trim added to sides

I did this on BOTH sides of the bookcase. It’s already looking so “fancy!”

Step 4: Attach Face Frame

Next, I needed to add a face frame to cover my front edges. So I assembled a frame the EXACT size as the front of my shelf. I wanted it to be flush on all sides.

I used 1x3s on the sides and top and a 1×6 on the bottom…so it matches the side trim.

You CAN just glue and nail these pieces individually onto the front of the shelf instead of assembling the frame together. But I prefer to attach my face frame together as one piece, then add it to the front of the shelf.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling large face frame on workbench with pocket holes

Either option works, but I personally find that assembling the frame together first makes the shelf more rigid and makes the joints come together more seamlessly.

So I assembled my frame using pocket holes and screws. Then I glued and nailed it onto the front of my shelf.

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing face frame onto front of bookshelf

I like my trim joints to look as seamless as possible when painting, so I carefully sanded everything flat and applied wood filler to cover the nail holes and smooth out all the joints.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood filler to joints on bookcase trim

After it dried, I sanded the filler smooth before adding the trim.

You can wait and do all of this smoothing and filling after adding the decorative trim, but I find it a lot easier to sand everything flat before adding the trim.

All the details, dimensions, and cut diagrams for the project can be found in the printable plans!

Step 5: Install Decorative Trim

To add a little extra detail and dimension, I added some decorative molding to the top and bottom of the shelf.

Crown molding is a great option for the top, but I had just enough scrap base cap molding to wrap around the sides and front, so I used that instead.

Feel free to customize the trim detail here to fit your style. I cut to fit, glued and brad nailed the base cap trim around the top.

Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing decorative trim around top of bookshelf on workshop floor

Then, I added baseboard trim around the bottom so it feels “even.” And now, I could finish this up with a coat of paint.

I painted the outside of my shelf in Behr Ocean Swell and the blue grey was a great contrast to the warm wood tones inside.

Shara Woodshop Diaries painting bookshelf blue in workshop

This simple bookshelf turned out beautifully and was such an enjoyable piece to build.

Completed DIY bookshelf with adjustable shelves painted blue with decorative baseboard and bas cap molding around top and bottom

To prevent tip-over, I recommend securing the shelf to the wall before use.

Ready to build your own? Grab the printable bookcase building plans here.

Looking for more bookshelf project ideas?

If you enjoyed this project, but are still looking for more bookshelf ideas, I’ve got you covered! Click on the image(s) below to see how to build each of these easy DIY bookshelves:

DIY Classic Bookcase
DIY Geometric Bookshelf
Modern Plywood Shelf
DIY Ladder Bookshelf
DIY Corner Shelf
Hidden Drawer Bookshelf
Library Bookshelf with Desk

Don’t forget to save this project for later by pinning it or sharing to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing overall dimensional diagram at top and Shara Woodshop Diaries next to bookshelf at bottom with text "how to build a bookcase"

Until next time, happy building!

DIY Buffet Table with Storage

March 13, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a DIY buffet table with storage!

I know this seems silly, but it’s often hard to give these projects a name because a buffet table is also just a console. It could sometimes even be considered a dresser of sorts.

Wooden DIY buffet table with two doors and three drawers stained in Minwax Early American wood stain

So it seems unfair to just give it a single title when it’s such a versatile piece!

Traditionally, a buffet table is a piece of furniture often used in dining rooms to store tableware and also provide a surface to serve food from (hence the term “buffet”).

And although this piece is perfect for that, it could also make a great entryway table, office console, or addition to the closet for clothing storage.

No matter how you choose to use it, it’s a great weekend build that will help you sharpen your door and drawer building skills. So, let’s dive in below and see how to build it!

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to know before building

This project includes both drawers and doors, so while it’s not a difficult DIY, I’d consider it an intermediate project. However, assembly is fairly quick and the joinery methods are basic.

I actually mentioned this a few times throughout the video tutorial below, but the main body of this build is very similar to several other projects I’ve shared before. (It is a lot like this double sink vanity and this 9 drawer dresser.)

This kind of solidifies by belief that many projects are essentially the same thing, just with slight variations. Speaking of variations, this design is pretty easy to modify.

DIY wooden buffet console cabinet with two doors open to show shelving inside. Three drawers in middle section

So feel free to swamp the drawers for open shelves, or swap one of the doors for more drawers, etc. It includes stationary shelves behind each door, but these could also be made as adjustable shelves using a shelf pin jig.

RELATED: How to add adjustable shelves

Overall dimensions

The overall dimensions of this buffet table are approximately 18″ deep x 32 ⅝″ tall x 53 ½″ wide.

Dimensional diagram of buffet table showing total height, width, and depth

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to apply edge banding
  • How to install drawer slides
  • How to build drawer boxes
  • How to build cabinet doors

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

How to Build a Buffet Table with Storage

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

YouTube thumbnail for how to build  a buffet cabinet video

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable buffet table building plans available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw and plywood cutting guides
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Miter Saw
  • Jig Saw
  • Dowel Jig
  • Table Saw

Materials:

  • (2) 4’x8′ sheets ¾″ plywood*
  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¼″ plywood*
  • (2) 2x4x8 boards*
  • (1) 1x2x8′ board*
  • (3) 1x3x8′ boards*
  • (100) 1 ¼” pocket hole screws
  • (4) 2 ½″ pocket hole screws
  • ⅜″ x 1 ½″ Dowel pins
  • (25) 1 ¼″ wood screws
  • Wood glue
  • (3) pair 16″ drawer slides
  • (2) pair 1 ½″ x 2 or 2 ½″ cabinet butt hinges
  • (2) magnetic catches
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)
  • Drawer/door pulls/knobs

*I used birch plywood and spruce/pine lumber for this project. Learn how to choose the right plywood for your project here. And learn how to shop for lumber here.

Step 1: Assemble Buffet Table Frame

First, I cut down the pieces to assemble the front and back frames of the buffet table.

I cut four pieces of 2×4 for the legs, but I ripped them to 2 ½″ wide (which makes them 2x3s). And I cut two pieces of 1×2 for the top supports and two pieces of 2×2 for the bottom supports.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing lumber on workbench to assemble buffet table frames

To add a little extra detail, I tapered the inside bottom corners of each leg 60 degrees. This is totally optional, but is a quick and easy way to dress them up.

Close up of tapers cut on inside of buffet table legs at miter saw

After sanding, I attached one 1×2 and one 2×2 between two legs using pocket holes and screws to make two identical frames. One will be for the front and one will be for the back of the table.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes

Then, I cut two pieces of ¾″ plywood to go between the frames to make the main body. I installed these using pocket holes and screws, but if you feel adventurous, you could also use wood glue and dowels, instead.

RELATED: How to cut plywood sheets

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling  buffet table cabinet on workbench with pocket hole screws

Prefer to print? You can find all the dimensions, cut lists, and step by step diagrams in the printable plans here.

Step 2: Install Dividers

Next, I needed to divide this “box” into three sections. The left and right sections will have a door and shelves, but the middle section will have drawers.

So I cut two pieces of ¾″ plywood for the bottom panels and two for the dividers.

The divider panels are a bit tricky because all four corners need to be carefully notched out with a jig saw to fit around the framing. This is detailed in the printable plans.

After cutting the notches, I test fit the divider panels into the buffet table frame before appying edge banding to the front edges (since they will be exposed in the finished project).

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing bottom panels of buffet console with pocket holes on workshop floor

RELATED: How to apply iron on edge banding

Then, I secured the bottom panels and the dividers into the frame using pocket holes and screws.

And I secure the dividers at the top using a few screws through the top supports.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing divider panels of console to top supports

TIP: It’s important to make sure the dividers stay parallel to the legs. They should be the same distance from the legs at the top AND the bottom.

Step 3: Add Drawers

Next, I cut a couple 1x3s to add into the middle section of this buffet table frame to divide my drawers. You can space these equally if you wanted, but I opted for two deeper bottom drawers and one shallow top drawer.

I installed these dividers using pocket holes and screws, then added three pair of 16″ drawer slides just above each one.

RELATED: How to install drawer slides

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer slides into center section of buffet cabinet

Then, I assembled the three drawer boxes to fit into these openings.

You can find all the dimensions and detailed diagrams in the printable plans for this project.

RELATED: Learn how to build a basic drawer box here

Shara Woodshop Diaries building drawer box on workbench

And I installed these drawer boxes onto the slides. Learn more about how to install drawer boxes here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer box onto slides in buffet table cabinet

The last part of the drawers is adding the fronts. I cut these drawer fronts from solid 1x pine boards, but in hindsight, I wish I’d used ¾″ plywood because I think it would have matched better once finished.

Either 1x lumber or ¾″ plywood would work fine for drawer fronts, so I cut three fronts to fit the openings and secured them with screws from inside each drawer box.

RELATED: How to install drawer fronts

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing drawer fronts onto drawers in buffet table

Step 4: Attach Shelves, Top & Back

I really debated on whether to add adjustable shelves to this project or stationary shelves. Either one is doable, but I ultimately decided on adding one stationary shelf into the left and right sections.

Similar to the dividers, these shelves need the back outside corners notched out to fit around the back legs.

So after carefully cutting them to fit, I applied edge banding to the front edge and installed these into the cabinet with pocket holes and screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing shelves into open sections of buffet table with pocket hole screws

Then I cut a piece of ¾″ plywood to use for the top. I cut this so that it would overhang the front and both sides ¾″ and I edge banded the front and sides so it looked a little more finished.

If you wanted to glue up solid 1x boards to make a solid wood (vs a plywood) top, you totally can!

I secured this top panel to the base using some wood screws through the top supports.

Attaching top panel of buffet table through top supports

Then, I cut a ¼″ plywood panel to fit over the back and stapled it on for the back.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable buffet table plans here.

Step 5: Build Buffet Table Doors

Now the last part is the doors…which also happens to be my favorite part!

What makes these doors unique is that I cut the ¼″ plywood center panels for the doors from ¼″ plywood, but then, I cut some shallow grooves in them (like shown below) to kind of “fake” a shiplap pattern.

This is totally optional, but it’s my favorite detail about this project.

Close up Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting kerfs in door panels to fake shiplap pattern

I’ve actually used this method to “fake” shiplap several times in the past and I’ve found that a lot of times the stain will kind of camouflage the cuts, so I stained the grooves with Minwax water based wood stain in true black to give them some contrast.

TIP: Use painters tape on each edge of the cut so you can contain the stain to ONLY going into the grooves.

Then, I cut 1×3 pieces to make the frame to go around this center panel. There are a lot of ways to make door frames, so this isn’t the ONLY method.

But I cut dadoes into the edges of my door frame pieces for the center panel and mitered the corners 45 degrees.

Shara Woodshop Diaries test fitting door frame and panel pieces together on workbench

I made sure everything fit together well, then assembled the door using wood glue and dowels.

RELATED: How to use a dowel jig

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling door panels using dowels on mitered corners on workbench

I clamped the frames and allowed to dry, then sanded away all the squeeze out at the joints.

Step 6: Finish Buffet Table

Then, I stained the doors and the cabinet separately in Minwax Early American and sealed it in three coats of Minwax Polycrylic.

RELATED: How to stain wood

Once the finish was dry, I installed the doors to the buffet table with simple cabinet butt hinges. I opted for visible hinges here because it seemed to fit the rustic vibe of this piece. But if you wanted to use concealed hinges, instead, you could.

Completed DIY buffet table with storage. Two doors on each side plus drawers in the middle section

And to finish this up, I added some simple black knobs to the doors and drawers. What a lovely piece to add to your dining room, home office, or just about anywhere you need some extra storage!

Looking for more DIY Console Table Ideas?

Enjoyed this build, but looking for more ideas? I’ve got you covered! Click on the image(s) below to learn how to build each one:

DIY TV Console
DIY Double Vanity
Arched Door Console Cabinet
DIY Console Shelf
Console Table with Drawers
DIY Display Shelf with Storage

If you enjoyed this post, be sure to save it for later by pinning or sharing to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing overall dimensional diagram of buffet table at top and Shara with buffet table at bottom with text "how to build a buffet table with storage"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

DIY EASY Murphy Desk from Plywood

February 23, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build an EASY DIY Murphy Desk that folds out from the wall!

This super simple build can be made completely from plywood scraps…OR just a half sheet of plywood if you don’t have scraps. PLUS, it’s so easy to customize.

Shara Woodshop Diaries sitting at DIY Murphy Desk. Desk folded out with laptop and storage inside for books and notebooks

Because it folds up when not in use, it’s the perfect solution for small spaces where you don’t have the floor space for full size desk.

It could even work well as a folding table in the laundry room, a craft desk, or a music practicing station.

It’s such a practical project and I’ll show you how easy it is to build below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This Murphy desk was built entirely from plywood scraps. However, if you’d like to trade some of the plywood pieces for solid wood, you can.

One of the best features of this design is that it’s really easy to customize. You can adjust the size to make a smaller or larger work surface. And you can divide up the inside with shelves to fit whatever items you’d like to store inside.

As is, this desk is about 6 ¾″ (including the door) deep x 24″ tall x 30″ wide when closed.

DIY Wooden Murphy Desk in Closed position hanging on wall

And the fold out desk is about 17 ½″ deep, so that makes the overall depth when open 23 ½″.

Overall dimensional diagram of DIY murphy desk in open position

INSTALLATION

This murphy desk should be securely fastened to the wall studs with at least 4 screws. To hang it, I drove 2 ½″ wood screws through the back support of the desk frame into the wall studs.

You can mount this as high or as low as you’d like, but standard desk height is 30″, so I installed it so that the bottom of the desk frame is 30″ above the floor.

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to apply edge banding

How to build a Murphy Desk

If you prefer to watch, here’s a quick video tutorial, but I’ve also got the step by step instructions below.

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable Murphy Desk building plans available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw and Kreg Rip Cut
  • Miter Saw
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Brad Nailer

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x4′ sheet ¾″ plywood
  • (1) ½″ square dowel (16″ long–optional)
  • (15) 1 ¼” pocket hole screws
  • (4) 2 ½” wood screws
  • 1 ¼” long brad nails
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)
  • (2) 1 ½″ x 2 ½″ butt hinges
  • (2) Lid Supports
  • (1) Chest Latch

Step 1: Assemble Murphy Desk Frame

Because I was building this from scrap plywood, the first thing I did was cut down my scraps into five pieces to build my desk frame:

  • (2) Sides
  • (2) Top & Bottom Shelves
  • (1) Back
DIY Murphy desk plywood parts cut out on workbench

I edge banded the front edges of the shelves, the front, top and bottom edges of the sides, and the top edge of the back because these will all be exposed in the finished project.

Learn how to cover plywood edges for a more finished look here.

Then, I drilled pocket holes into the ends of the shelves and into the ends and along one edge of the back piece.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes

Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling pocket holes in plywood

Then, I assembled the main frame of the Murphy desk with pocket hole screws. The back piece goes flush to the back and top edges of the sides like you see below.

One shelf goes below the back and the other goes at the bottom.

Wooden Murphy Desk frame assembled with pocket holes on workbench

Prefer to print? Grab the printable plans for this project with full cut list here.

Step 2: Customize the Inside

Now that the frame was together, I moved on to customizing the inside. This is where you can get creative to add shelves or dividers to fit whatever you’d like to store inside.

I kept things simple and just cut some scrap plywood to add a divider and a small shelf in the right section. I brad nailed these in place.

DIY Murphy desk frame with shelves installed

NOTE: You’ll notice that in the photo, the shelf is the same depth as the frame. But when I got to step 4, I realized the lid supports wouldn’t work because the shelf was in the way. So I ended up having to remove it and trim it about ¾″ shallower. This is noted in the plans.

I planned to store taller books, notebooks, and a laptop in the left section, so I added a small piece across the front to help keep those things from falling forward.

I cut to fit a piece of ½″ square dowel for this, but a small piece of plywood or other size lumber would work as well. I just brad nailed this piece through the side and divider panels.

Using brad nailer to install divider pieces in Murphy desk frame

Step 3: Install Murphy Desk Fold Out Door

For the fold down desk piece (or the door, depending on how you’d like to label it haha), I cut another piece of ¾″ plywood to fit over the front.

After edge banding all the sides, I stained the desk frame and this fold out piece separately. I thought it would be easier to stain them before attaching, so I applied Minwax Water Based Wood Stain in Driftwood and allowed to dry.

Then I attached the fold out panel to the desk frame with some cabinet butt hinges along the bottom.

Close up of hinges used to attach Murphy desk fold out piece

That way, this piece can fold open once it’s hung on the wall.

Step 4: Add Murphy Desk Supports and Latch

But the problem with basic hinges is that they allow the fold out piece to fold ALL the way down, so to keep it in a square position, I added some chest latches to each side.

These worked really well to help “lock” the front in the open position.

Lid supports installed on fold out Murphy desk

And to keep it securely closed, I added a simple chest latch on one side. That way, it doesn’t accidentally fall open.

Close up of chest latch installed on side of murphy desk to hold door shut

Step 5: Hang Murphy Desk on Wall

Now this desk is ready to hang, so I measured up from the floor about 30″ and raised the frame so that the bottom was even with my mark.

Then, I secured it to the wall studs with screws through the back support. A level helps ensure it’s not crooked while being installed!

DIY Murphy desk hung on wall with fold down panel open and level sitting on top

And with that, it’s ready to be put to work! The small shelves on the right are perfect for notebooks, pens, camera equipment, and other odds and ends.

The large section on the left is perfect for storing laptops, large notebooks, and binders.

DIY Murphy desk with fold down desk top open

If you’re ready to build your own, don’t forget to check out the printable plans available here.

Looking for more scrap plywood projects?

Enjoyed this scrap plywood project, but looking for more ideas? I got you! Click on the images below to check out these popular scrap wood projects:

Seed Storage Box
DIY Puzzle Board
DIY Pie Box
Small Parts Jig for Miter Saw
Mug Holder Shelf
Floating wall shelves from scrap wood with industrial details
Scrap Wood Wall Shelves

If you’d like to save this project for later, don’t forget to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage showing Murphy desk closed at top and murphy desk open at bottom with Shara working on laptop at bottom. Text in center "how to build a murphy desk"

Until next time, happy building!

How to Build a Barrister Bookcase with Pocket Doors

February 19, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’ll show you how to build a unique barrister bookcase with pocket doors.

This style of bookcase features stationary shelving with glass (or in this case, plexiglass) paneled doors that lift up and slide inside. The doors help protect the contents inside from dust.

Shara Woodshop Diaries standing next to DIY lawyer bookcase opening second door from the top. Top door open and bottom two doors closed. Bookcase made from red oak

Back in the day, these bookcases were common for lawyers to keep their books in, so they’re also sometimes referred to as lawyer bookcases. So fancy!

But, it’s not just for books. This shelf would also make an excellent linen cabinet, or I’ve even seen them used as a storage cabinet for shoes, purses or clothes.

The pocket doors make this a stunning and unique conversation piece, but the build itself is actually quite simple. I’m sharing the steps to build your own below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This easy to build pocket door bookcase comes together quickly and is a great option for a weekend woodworking project.

Despite it’s simplicity, the result is a sturdy heirloom piece that is solid, strong and stylish enough for any room of the house.

And while the doors are obviously a fun feature, this shelf still looks and functions beautifully without them. So for an even quicker build, feel free to skip the doors.

Overall dimensions

The overall dimensions of this pocket door bookcase are approximately 14″ deep x 60 ¾″ tall x 33″ wide.

DIY Barrister bookcase overall dimensional diagram showing 14" deep x 33" wide x 60 ¾" tall.

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to apply edge banding
  • How to build cabinet doors

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

How to Build a Barrister Bookcase

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

YouTube Thumbnail image for pocket door bookshelf

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable barrister bookcase building plans available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw and Kreg Rip Cut
  • Miter Saw
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Dowel Jig (⅜″ recommended)
  • Router & ⅜″ Rabbeting Bit
  • Chisel
  • Brad or Finish nailer

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x8′ sheets ¾″ plywood
  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¼″ plywood
  • (4) 1x2x6′ boards
  • (4) 1x3x8′ boards
  • (2) 18″ x 24″ Acrylic Sheets (about ⅛″ thick)
  • 1 ¼” pocket hole screws (100 count box)
  • (6) 1 ¼” wood screws
  • 1 ¼” long brad or finish nails
  • (32) ⅜″ x 1 ½″ dowel pins
  • Wood glue
  • Gorilla Clear Grip Glue or other clear adhesive
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)
  • (4) Pocket Door Hardware Kits with 12″ Slides (see notes)
  • Knobs/Pulls for Doors

Not sure what type of wood to use for this project?

1x LUMBER & TRIM: If painting, preprimed pine, spruce, or poplar are great budget friendly options. And if staining, usually, you want to use the same wood type as your plywood or something that will stain similarly so that they match. Check out this post to learn how to shop for and purchase lumber for your project.

PLYWOOD: I recommend using cabinet grade hardwood plywood (like birch, maple, oak, etc). Check out this post to learn how to choose the right plywood for your project.

This project was built with red oak 1x lumber and red oak plywood.

Step 1: Assemble Bookcase Body

To get started, I began cutting down my plywood. You can find the full cut diagram for the plywood sheets in the printable plans.

For the main body of this bookcase, I cut my ¾″ plywood sheet down into:

  • (2) Tall Side Panels
  • (4) Shelves
  • (2) Thin Top Support Strips
  • (1) Thin Toe Kick Piece
Shara Woodshop Diaries placing cut plywood parts on workbench to prepare for building

The really nice thing about this design is that it’s SUPER easy to modify the size, so if you wanted a taller shelf, you can cut your sides longer and if you wanted it wider, you can cut your shelves longer. Or vice versa.

Once the pieces were cut, I applied edge banding to the front edges of the sides, shelves and top supports, then drilled pocket holes into the ends of each strip and all my shelves.

RELATED: How to cover plywood edges

ALSO RELATED: How to use pocket holes

Then, I assembled my main bookcase body using pocket holes and screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling plywood bookcase using pocket holes on workbench

I spaced my shelves out equally so that all my openings were identical. That way, all my doors will also be the same size.

You’ll see I added two of my plywood strips at the top, but I installed my third plywood strip underneath my bottom shelf to act as a toe kick.

Then, I cut and nailed a ¼″ plywood panel to cover the back side.

Shara Woodshop Diaries standing next to completed bookcase body with shelves and back panel added in workshop

This part all came together really quick!

Step 2: Attach Trim & Top

Next, I wanted to dress up this basic box a little and I thought adding some thickness along the front edge would make it look a bit more…substantial? I’m not sure that’s the best word, but I wanted it to look less skinny.

So I cut some 1x2s to run vertically up the sides flush to the front and back edges. Then I cut a 1×2 to run between them at the top and a 1×3 to run between them at the bottom.

I just glued and nailed these pieces in place. It’s important to make sure the front edge is nice and flush, so I did use some clamps to help.

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing trim pieces onto sides of barrister bookcase

Then, I cut and attached a ¾″ plywood top panel to finish up the bookcase.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing top panel to barrister bookcase using screws

Prefer to print? Grab the printable plans for this barrister bookcase here.

Step 3: Assemble Door Frames

This bookcase needs four doors: one for each opening. When building glass (or acrylic) doors, I like to build the frames first, then route out the back side to install the glass.

You can find 7 ways to build a cabinet door here. I used method number 4 to build these doors.

So I cut 1x3s to build my four frames and assembled them using wood glue and dowels at each corner.

RELATED: How to use a dowel jig

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling a door frame using dowels on workbench

After the glue had dried on my frames, I used a router with a rabbeting bit to route along the inside edge on the backs of each frame. I routed so that the depth matched my acrylic sheet thickness, so it will set down into the groove flush.

Shara Woodshop Diaries routing a rabbet on back side of red oak door frame

After routing, the corners are round (that’s the downside to using a router for this), so I had to chisel the corners square.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable barrister bookcase building plans here.

Close up of chiseling out rabbet corner on door frame

Now the bookcase and the door frames are built, so before installing the doors, I went ahead and finished the pieces separately. I stained them using Minwax Weathered Oak Wood Stain and sealed them with a few coats of Minwax Polycrylic.

RELATED: How to stain wood furniture

Step 4: Install Pocket Door Hardware

Pocket door hardware is typically made up of both hinges and slides. While most pocket door hardware is similar, not every brand or style is identical.

So I’ll share how I installed the pocket door hardware I used. But, if you use a different brand or style of hardware, these steps may vary.

REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION OF POCKET DOORS & POCKET DOOR HARDWARE.

First, I mounted my slides to a ¾″ plywood strip like shown below. I did this for all four doors and I cut these about ½″ shorter than my bookcase shelves.

Pocket door hardware slides mounted to plywood strip on workbench

Then, I installed these on the UNDERSIDE of each of my shelves. I found it easiest to flip the bookcase upside down to install these.

A speed square helps ensure the slides are installed square so they’ll slide smoothly.

pocket door hardware slides mounted to underside of bookcase shelves with a speed square

Then, I installed the hinges onto my door frames (see video for more information), so I could install these onto the wood strips on my slides.

This allows the doors to hinge open and slide into the cabinet.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing hinges to wood strut to install pocket doors in bookcase

Step 5: Install Acrylic Door Panels

The location of the hinge cup holes was very close to the rabbet in the door frames. So I thought it best to drill and install the hinges and get the doors properly fit before adding the acrylic to avoid any interference.

I know this seems a little backwards, but after installing the door frames, I unscrewed them from the hinges to install the acrylic.

I cut acrylic panels to fit into the rabbet on each door frame. Then, I carefully glued them into the rabbets on each door using Gorilla Clear Grip Glue.

Shara Woodshop Diaries carefully placing acrylic sheet into rabbet on back side of door frame on workbench

If desired, you can reinforce the panels (in addition to the glue) with brackets or picture frame turn buttons as well.

Close up of picture frame turn button used to hold plexiglass in door frame

After the glue dried, I installed the doors back onto the hinges in the bookcase. This was pretty easy since they just kind of pop back into the hinge cup holes.

Step 6: Add Finishing Touches

After I installed the doors back to the bookcase, I flipped it right side and added some catches to keep doors flush when closed (these catches came with my pocket door hardware kit, so I didn’t have to buy anything additional).

The hardware kit I purchased also came with some small bearings to install underneath the doors on each side to hold them up when opened. And lastly, I added some simple black knobs to finish this up.

Close up of pocket door opened on DIY barrister bookcase showing door catch and bearings holding door in up position

I am so excited with how this turned out and, honestly, it was easier to build than I thought! The pocket door hardware worked great and was straightforward to install.

This is really a neat storage piece that looks great with the doors open or shut!

DIY red oak Barrister bookcase with four pocket doors opened revealing books inside

Because this piece is tall, I recommend securing it to the wall to prevent tip over.

DIY Barrister bookcase with doors closed

If you’d like to build your own, you can find the printable plans available here.

Looking for more DIY Bookshelf Project ideas?

Enjoyed this build, but looking for more ideas? I’ve got you covered! Click on the image(s) below to learn how to build each bookshelf:

DIY Geometric Bookshelf
DIY Classic Bookcase
Modern Plywood Shelf
DIY Ladder Bookshelf
Hidden Drawer Bookshelf

If you enjoyed this post, be sure to save it for later by pinning or sharing to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing overall dimensional diagram at top and Shara standing next to completed barrister bookcase at bottom with text "how to build a barrister bookcase with pocket doors"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

DIY Puzzle Board with Drawers

February 14, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a rotating puzzle board with drawers!

I love jig saw puzzles. But, there never seems to be a good place to work on one where it isn’t in the way.

I really needed a dedicated surface…but one that was also mobile so I could easily put it away when not in use.

DIY puzzle board with four drawers made from scrap plywood sitting on worksurface with drawers open and puzzle pieces stored inside

I had seen some neat puzzle boards online, but they were a bit pricey. So I decided to build my own from plywood scraps! It’s got four drawers to store the loose pieces, and can easily slide under the couch, under the bed or under the table and out of the way.

Plus, it rotates on a lazy susan!

This puzzle board is such a fun project to build, but even more fun to use, and I’m excited to share how to build it below!

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This project was built entirely from plywood scraps. However, if you’d like to trade some of the plywood pieces for solid wood, you can.

This really is a great scrap plywood project because it needs a small amount of each: ¼″, ½″ and ¾″ thick material.

Stack of scrap plywood on workbench. Includes ¼", ½" and ¾" plywood

But, if you prefer to use solid wood, swapping the framing in step 1 and the trim in step 3 for solid wood pieces (cut to the same size, of course) is fine.

But, if you swap the ½″ plywood drawer trim in step 2 with solid wood, it’s important to ensure the overall height of the drawer is less than the height of the framing used in step 1. The drawers must be able to slide into the “cubbies” of the puzzle board.

NOTE: Plywood thickness is nominal. Typically, ACTUAL plywood thickness is slightly under the nominal value (different grades and brands may vary slightly). So ¾″ plywood may actually be closer to 23/32″. And ½″ plywood may be closer to 29/64″, etc. THAT IS OKAY–in this case, that actually works out for the best.

The main thing to make sure of before building is that your your ¼″ and ½″ plywood stacked together is thinner (even just barely) than your ¾″ plywood.

Overall Dimensions

I built this puzzle board to fit MOST basic 1000 piece puzzles. You can adjust the sizing for a larger puzzle if desired.

As is, this puzzle board ended up being about 23″ deep x 30″ wide x 1 ¾″ tall (not including the Lasy Susan hardware).

Puzzle board overall dimensional diagram showing 23" x 30" puzzle board

This can fit puzzles up to 21 ½″ x 28 ½″.

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

How to build a puzzle board with drawers

If you prefer to watch, here’s a quick video tutorial, but I’ve also got the step by step instructions below.

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable puzzle board building plans available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Table Saw
  • Brad Nailer
  • Clamps
  • Drill

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x4′ sheet ¼″ plywood
  • (1) 4 ½″ x 30″ piece of ¾″ plywood (or solid lumber–see notes)
  • (1) 9 ½″ x 34″ piece of ½″ plywood (or solid lumber–see notes)
  • ⅜″ dowel rod (only need 4″)
  • Wood Glue
  • 1″ brad nails
  • Large 12-16″ lazy susan (optional)

Step 1: Assemble Puzzle Board Frame

First, I cut a piece of ¼” plywood to the size I wanted my puzzle board top. You want to make sure this is a couple inches bigger than the size of the typical puzzles you like to work.

Then, I trimmed some ¾” plywood strips to make the framing. I already had some thin strips of plywood for this, so I just trimmed these to length, but in hindsight, I wish I’d trimmed these a little narrower to be able to make my drawers larger.

Shara Woodshop Diaries fitting puzzle board framing pieces onto puzzle board top on workbench

So I’ve adjusted this in the printable plans here.

I cut two strips for the sides, one for the middle, and two to connect them at the center. Then I glued these onto the bottom side of my ¼” plywood panel.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing and clamping puzzle board frame pieces to top panel

By the way, I could have edge banded these pieces to hide the exposed plies, but I opted to leave them as is.

If you’d like to cover the plywood edges, iron on edge banding is a great option! Learn how to apply edge banding here.

Step 2: Build Puzzle Board Drawers

While that dried, I moved on to building the drawers. This frame can fit four drawers, so I searched one of my many scrap piles for some ¼″ plywood pieces to use for the drawer bottoms.

I trimmed four pieces just about ⅛” narrower than the openings between my frame so they will be able to slide in and out.

Then, I ripped some ½” plywood into ¾” wide strips to make the drawer sides.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries clamping sides around drawers for puzzle board

I cut four pieces from these strips with 45 degree mitered ends to glue around the edges of each drawer bottom. This gives me four really shallow drawers, which is perfect for puzzle pieces.

After my ½” plywood is glued to my ¼” bottoms, they end up being just slightly less than the thickness of my ¾” plywood. Which works out well for these drawers to slide into these puzzle board cubbies.

four shallow drawers made from ¼" and ½" plywood stacked on workbench

Step 3: Attach Top Trim

While the glue dried on my drawers, I moved back to the main board. I decided to stain my top black to give it some contrast. This is completed optional, but I used Minwax Water Based Stain in True Black.

Then, just like the drawers, I cut to fit and lined the top panel with ½” plywood strips as well. That way, my puzzle can stay contained in the top and not slip off the edges.

½" plywood strips glued and clamped around top of puzzle board on workbench

And again, all of these edges could be banded, but I opted to leave them. I’m not really a big fan of the exposed edges, but it would have been a lot of banding.

Step 4: Install Bottom Supports

Now the doors can slide into the puzzle board frame (two on each end), but nothing keeps them in if it’s lifted or moved.

Shara Woodshop Diaries sliding drawers into puzzle board frame

So I needed to add something to the bottom to help hold the drawers in place.

For this, I ripped some strips of ¼″ plywood to kind of “line” the frame. I cut these to fit and they should overhang the inside edges of the framing at least ¼″ so the drawers can rest on them.

All the dimensions, details, and cut lists can be found in the printable plans here.

Then, I glued and brad nailed these pieces onto the frame.

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing ¼" plywood strips onto the bottom of puzzle board

Step 5: Add Knobs and Lazy Susan Hardware

While this was upside down, I went ahead and added the Lazy Susan hardware to the center. This is completely optional, but it is kind of nice to be able to rotate the board when using it.

There are a TON of lazy susan options out there and most will fit this application well. I’d recommend a 12″-16″ size.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing lazy susan to bottom of puzzle board

The Lazy Susan should be secured to the puzzle board framing. As seen above, some small ¼″ plywood spacer blocks may be needed where the Lazy Susan doesn’t contact the bottom supports from step 4.

Then, the last part was simply adding some knobs to the drawers so you can slide them in and out.

This is obviously not the ONLY option, but I cut some small wooden dowel pegs to use as my knobs. I drilled holes in the front of each drawer and glued them in place.

dowel peg glued into puzzle board drawer as a knob

And now this board is ready for a brand new puzzle!

Completed DIY puzzle board with drawers open. Puzzle pieces stored in drawers

I love how the spare pieces store away in the drawers, so I don’t have to worry about losing them.

DIY Puzzle board with drawers closed. Puzzle started on top.

If you’d like to build your own, grab the printable plans for this puzzle board here!

Looking for more scrap plywood projects?

Enjoyed this scrap plywood project, but looking for more ideas? I got you! Click on the images below to check out these popular scrap wood projects:

Behind the Door Shelf
Small Parts Jig for Miter Saw
DIY Pie Box
Mug Holder Shelf
Floating wall shelves from scrap wood with industrial details
Scrap Wood Wall Shelves
Scrap Wood Clamp Rack

If you’d like to save this project for later, don’t forget to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing overall puzzle board dimensions at top and completed puzzle board at bottom with text "how to build a puzzle board from wood scraps"

Until next time, happy building!

DIY TV Stand Console

February 11, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’ll show you how to build a simple TV stand console with shelves!

This design is simple, but stylish and features six cubbies, perfect for storing DVD players, gaming modules, books, board games and other entertainment.

Dark brown stained DIY TV stand console with arches in top of face frame. Open shelves with books and blankets

The subtle details, like stairstep trim at the top and arches on the face frame, help keep this piece modern, but certainly not plain. It could even work well in an office or as toy storage in a playroom.

No matter how you use it, it’s a great weekend woodworking project, so let’s dive into how to build your own below!

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to know before building

This project is an easy beginner to intermediate woodworking project that comes together quickly. So it’s a great choice for a weekend DIY project.

It’s also easy to customize in both size and style. Feel free to swap out the plain 1x trim pieces along the top and bottom for something more curvy for a more traditional look.

Overall dimensions

The overall dimensions of this TV stand console are approximately 24 ¼″ deep x 25 ¾″ tall x 55″ wide.

Dimensional diagram of TV stand console showing overall dimensions in width, height, and depth

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to install adjustable shelves
  • How to cut angles on a miter saw
  • How to choose which screw to use

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

How to build a TV Stand Console

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

YouTube Thumbnail image for TV stand console tutorial video

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable TV stand building plans available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw and Plywood Cutting Guides (Kreg Rip Cut & AccuCut)
  • Miter Saw
  • Jig Saw (optional)
  • Pocket Hole Jig (standard size)
  • Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig (optional)
  • Brad or Finish nailer

Materials:

  • (2) 4’x8′ sheets ¾″ plywood
  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¼″ plywood
  • (2) 1x2x8′ boards
  • (1) 1x3x8′ board
  • (1) 1x4x8′ board
  • (1) ¾″ x ¾″ x 10′ square dowel OR other trim
  • 1 ¼” pocket hole screws (100 count box)
  • (12) 1 ¼” wood screws
  • 1 ¼” long brad or finish nails
  • Wood glue
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)

Not sure what type of wood to use for this project?

1x LUMBER & TRIM: If painting, preprimed pine, spruce, or poplar are great budget friendly options. And if staining, usually, you want to use the same wood type as your plywood or something that will stain similarly so that they match. Check out this post to learn how to shop for and purchase lumber for your project.

PLYWOOD: I recommend using cabinet grade hardwood plywood (like birch, maple, oak, etc). Check out this post to learn how to choose the right plywood for your project.

This project was built with pine/spruce 1x lumber and birch plywood.

Step 1: Assemble TV Stand Cabinet

To get started, I cut down the plywood to build the main cabinet. This cabinet is built using ¾″ plywood for the body and ¼″ plywood for the back panel. So for now, I just cut the ¾″ pieces…I’ll get to the back in a later step.

RELATED: How to cut down plywood sheets

I cut four side/divider panels, three bottom shelves, three middle shelves, and six strips to use for the top supports (two strips for each section).

The full cut list and plywood cut diagrams can be found in the printable plans.

Shara Woodshop Diaries stacking plywood pieces on workbench

Once the pieces were cut, I drilled pocket holes into both ends of the support strips and along both sides of each shelf.

RELATED: How to drill pocket holes for woodworking

Then, I assembled the TV stand body using pocket hole screws. This stand is basically three sections, so I kind of assembled it in three parts.

First, I installed one bottom and one middle shelf plus two top supports between two of my sides.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling part of TV stand console with pocket hole screws on workbench

Then, I installed the other two sections the same way to complete the body. I faced the shelf pocket holes down and the top support pocket holes up that way they’ll all be hidden in the finished project.

Completed DIY tv stand cabinet body made from plywood.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this project here.

Step 2: Add Face Frame

Next, I needed to add the face frame. I built the face frame from 1x2s and 1x4s (just your basic construction lumber from the big box store). I used 1x2s for the vertical pieces and 1x4s for the top and bottom pieces.

Why did I use different size boards? I wanted the top and bottom to be a bit “chunkier” because I’m adding trim in the next step.

To give the top a little extra detail, I decided to cut some arches in the top left and right sections of the face frame. (You could totally do this for all three sections, but I left the middle section as is.)

So I used an old lazy susan from a base cabinet (I always like to search the shop for round objects to trace for things like this) to trace a curve on the top left and right face frame boards.

Shara Woodshop Diaries tracing arch onto 1x4 for TV stand face frame

Then, I cut the curves out with a jig saw and assembled the face frame using pocket holes and screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling face frame on workbench using pocket hole screws

TIP: A standard size pocket hole jig can work if you’re careful, but I recommend using a Kreg Micro Jig for these face frame pieces with pan head pocket hole screws. The smaller holes and screws are less likely to cause splits.

Learn how, when, and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig here.

Then, I glued and brad nailed the face frame onto the front of my cabinet. See the arches in the top? I think they add just the right amount of subtle detail. But–they’re totally optional, so if you’re not a fan, you can skip that part.

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing face frame onto front of tv stand cabinet body

Step 3: Install Trim Details at Top and Bottom

To dress this up just a little more, I added some additional trim to the top and bottom. So I cut to fit 1x3s around the bottom…kind of like a baseboard…beveling the corners 45 degrees.

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing 1x3 trim around bottom of tv stand build in workshop

Then, I added 1x2s around the top the same way. I just glued and brad nailed each piece around the sides and the front.

After adding the 1×2 at the top, I wanted to add an additional ¾″ square dowel (just a ¾″ x ¾″ trim piece) on top of it. This just added a bit of extra dimension at the top and almost looks like a stairstep.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing square dowel trim around top of tv stand project

Of course, if you wanted your trim a little less square, you could go with a curvier trim, like cove or half round, or even a small crown molding.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this TV stand here.

Step 4: Attach Top of TV Stand

I cut the top of the TV stand from ¾″ plywood to fit over my cabinet so that it overhung the sides and front ¾″.

I also edge banded the exposed plywood edges to make this look a bit more finished. You can learn how to cover plywood edges here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing top panel of tv stand using screws

I centered the top on the cabinet and used wood screws through the top supports in each section to secure it.

Step 5: Install Back Panel

The last part was adding the back panel. For this, I cut a piece of ¼″ plywood to fit over the back. But I wanted to make sure there were holes in the back to be able to run cords to plug things in.

So I traced a semi circle (using a roll of painters tape!) onto the back panel so that there would be a hole in each of the six sections of the cabinet.

Then, I cut these out with a jig saw.

Shara Woodshop Diaries using jig saw to cut out sections of back panel to run cables and cords in TV stand

Before attaching the back, I decided to go ahead and stain the cabinet and the back panel separately. So I stained them in Minwax Mocha and applied a few coats of Minwax Polycrylic to seal them.

RELATED: How to stain wood furniture PLUS How to apply clear coat

Once they were finished, I tacked the back panel onto the cabinet with brad nails.

Shara Woodshop Diaries stapling back panel onto TV stand project

This simple modern TV stand cabinet is such a great little project and would make a great addition to the living room, home office, or bedroom.

Completed DIY TV stand with six open cubbies and holes in the back for cords and cables. Stained dark brown with books and blankets inside

It provides plenty of storage, and is so very versatile.

Finished DIY TV stand console viewed from the front corner with modern trim around top and bottom and stained dark brown

If you’d like to build your own, you can grab the printable plans here!

Looking for more DIY Furniture projects?

Enjoyed this build, but looking for more ideas? I’ve got you covered! Click on the image(s) below to learn how to build one of your own OR check out all our DIY furniture tutorials here.

DIY Console Shelf
Arched Door Console Cabinet
Console Table with Drawers
DIY Display Console Cabinet
DIY Classic Bookcase
Mid Century Lowboy Console

If you enjoyed this post, be sure to save it for later by pinning or sharing to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage showing Finished TV stand console at top and Shara standing next to TV stand at bottom with text "how to build a TV stand"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

Easy DIY Miter Saw Jig for Cutting Small Parts

February 8, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a simple jig to make cutting small parts on your miter saw easier.

Have you struggled with cutting very small pieces with your miter saw? I’ll be honest…I cringe every time I use the miter saw to cut a really small piece.

miter saw with small piece ready to cut

The miter saw is my go to choice for quick, accurate cuts. But, the problem is most miter saws don’t provide the proper support underneath and behind to cut very small pieces.

I’ve admittedly cut some way too small pieces over the years and the drywall behind my miter saw has several dents and scratches from when those cuts went wrong (and the pieces went flying!).

For cutting small pieces, you really need a special jig. Luckily, they’re easy to make and I’m actually quite embarrassed I didn’t do this sooner!

small parts cutting jig clamped to miter saw

This is a handy addition to any workshop and I’ll show you how to make your own below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to know before building

There are MANY ways to make a small parts jig for a miter saw, so this definitely isn’t the ONLY way.

But this simple method utilizes just a small piece of ¾″ plywood scrap and is not overly complicated.

I opted to use T tracks to be able to clamp my small parts at any point along the jig. These tracks should be placed on the jig so that they won’t interfere with the blade. This is noted in the steps below.

The size of the jig can vary (see step 1), but I recommend making it at least 24-30″ long.

How to make a miter saw small parts cutting jig

If you prefer to watch, here’s a quick video tutorial, but I’ve also got the step by step instructions below.

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Table Saw (or router or circular saw–see notes below)
  • Jig Saw (optional)
  • Drill/Driver

Materials:

  • Scrap ¾″ plywood panel (approx. 14″ x 30″)
  • (4) 1 ¼″ wood screws
  • (2) 12″ T Tracks
  • (6) #6 x ⅜″ wood screws
  • T Track Clamps

Step 1: Cut Jig Parts

This jig needs two parts: a bottom and a back. These don’t have to be specific dimensions, so feel free to customize or use whatever size ¾″ plywood scraps you may have on hand.

But the bottom piece needs to be a few inches wider than the depth your miter saw can cut.

Shara Woodshop Diaries measuring miter saw blade depth with tape measure

So, first, I measured from the back rail of my saw to the front edge of the blade and added a few inches to give me about 11″. For reference, I have a 12″ miter saw. A 10″ saw will be a bit less.

TIP: If you have a sliding miter saw like mine, measure with the blade pushed all the way back.

So I found a piece of scrap ¾″ plywood about 14″ x 30″ and ripped it to 11″ wide. I can use the leftover ~3″ piece for the back.

plywood scrap pieces cut to size for small parts jig

Step 2: Cut Slot for T Track

I’m installing a T track into this jig to be able to clamp the small pieces, so I need to notch a slot into the bottom piece for it to slide into.

So I adjusted the blade depth on my table saw to match the thickness of my T track and I cut a kerf about 4 ½″ and 5 ¼″ from one edge of my bottom board. The T track is ¾″ wide, so I checked that it would fit.

Close up of blade kerfs cut in plywood to fit t track pieces

Then, I made multiple passes between these kerfs to cut out everything between them. The T track should fit into this slot and be flush across the top.

T track placed in slot cut in ¾" plywood panel for small parts miter saw jig

TIP: If you didn’t want to use a table saw here, you could also use a router OR a circular saw to cut this slot.

How did I decide where to cut the T track slot?

I’m using these clamps with my tracks. So I made sure to cut the notch close enough to the back edge that my clamp could reach the back board. That way, I knew my pieces would be within range of the clamp no matter what size they are.

Closeup of t track clamps showing t track bolt lined up with t track slot

Step 3: Assemble Jig and Cut Kerfs

Next, I placed the smaller back strip of plywood along the back edge of the bottom piece, clamped and screwed together.

I spread out and countersunk 4 screws through the bottom to attach (keep the screws away from the center as this is where the cuts will be made).

Back rail of small parts jig clamped to bottom piece with screws along edge

Then, I clamped my jig to my miter saw and cut a 0 degree miter cut in the center and two 45 degree miter cuts on each side.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting blade kerfs in small parts jig with miter saw

Just like in step 1, if your miter saw slides, make these cuts with the blade pushed all the way back. You don’t want to cut your jig in two.

zero degrees and 45 degrees cut into miter saw small parts jig at center

Why these angles? Most commonly, when cutting small parts, you’ll be cutting at one of these three angles (think about small trim pieces). But, if you wanted to cut different angles for your jig, you certainly can.

Step 4: Install T Tracks

Here’s the kind of pain-in-the-butt part. Unfortunately my blade kerf on the 45 degree miters cut into my T track slot (see image below). This likely wouldn’t be a problem with a 10″ saw, but my 12″ saw is pretty big.

I could have moved my slot further away, but then my clamp wouldn’t have full range (see step 2).

So, to work around this, I used a jig saw and a thick metal blade to kind of notch out my T tracks to fit around the kerfs.

If your kerfs don’t cut into your T track slot, there’s no need to notch them.

T tracks fit into slot of plywood jig with notches around the 45 degree kerfs

I didn’t want to cut all the way through the tracks because I didn’t want to leave the middle pieces with only one screw hole. Just notching them allowed them to stay stronger and still act as one piece.

Then, I could secure them with wood screws.

Heads up: the screws that come with the T tracks are too long to use in this application. I ended up having to grab a small pack of #6 x ⅜″ wood screws from my local hardware store to secure these tracks. Because they are so short, you can add a drop or two of super glue to them before driving to give them extra hold.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing t tracks into jig with screws

TIP: Leave a little wiggle room between the blade kerfs and the T track (like shown above). You don’t want your saw blade to interfere with the tracks while cutting.

Step 5: Test out the Jig

Now this jig is ready for clamps and a few test cuts!

To use:

  1. Align the kerf on the jig with the saw blade
  2. Clamp jig to miter saw (clamp along back rail)
  3. Slide T track clamp(s) into tracks on the jig and clamp piece to be cut. Ensure wood piece is secure and not moving
  4. Carefully cut piece. If you’re using a sliding miter saw, keep the blade pushed all the way back.
Small parts jig clamped into miter saw with small block inside ready to cut
Close up of small piece cut on miter saw with DIY small parts jig

This simple jig works great because it supports the small piece both at the back and at the bottom during the cut. And it allows you to securely clamp the piece close to the blade without using your hands.

I wish I’d added this to my workshop years ago!

Looking for more DIY Scrap Plywood Projects?

Enjoyed this scrap plywood project, but looking for more ideas? I got you! Click on the images below to check out these popular scrap wood projects:

Under Sink Organizer
Scrap Wood Clamp Rack
Scrap Wood Cart
Battery Charging Station
Mug Holder Shelf
DIY Pie Box

If you’d like to save this project for later, don’t forget to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing small parts miter saw jig at top and small piece cut at the bottom with text "how to cut small pieces with a miter saw"

Until next time, happy building!

DIY Scrap Wood Pie Box

February 1, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to make a simple wooden DIY pie box using scrap plywood!

Picture this: You’ve been invited to a last minute dinner party and aren’t sure what to bring. What’s your go to “potluck” dish?

Scrap plywood pie box with sliding lid and "handmade pie" logo on top revealing a pie inside

Mine is dessert…ALWAYS dessert. It’s just hard to go wrong with something full of sugar, flour, and butter, you know? And my favorite dessert to bring is PIE!

But throwing tin foil over the pie dish as I head out the door isn’t exactly “classy.”

So I decided to turn some scrap plywood into an adorable wooden pie carrier that’s not only cute, but also practical (as in no more pie sliding around in the floorboard on the drive over!).

If you’re ready to wow the guests at your next get together, I’m sharing how to make your own below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

I made this project from birch plywood scraps, but you could use solid wood instead if you’d like. A solid hardwood like walnut or cherry would make a beautiful pie box!

I used ½″ plywood for the sides and ¼″ plywood for the bottom panel and the lid. But if you didn’t have ½″ thick material, ¾″ would work well, too.

½" and ¼" plywood scraps laid on workbench

And, if you wanted, you could swap the plywood lid for a piece of acrylic or plexiglass for a “window” to see inside.

What size should a pie box be?

Most common pie dishes and pans are 9-10″ diameter. This doesn’t include any handles they may have (some, but not all, of my glass pie pans have handles on each side for carrying).

Wooden Ruler on glass pie dish showing the diameter

And typically, a pie will end up being roughly 2-3″ tall…unless it’s got a ton of whipped cream or meringue topping.

So I made my pie box so that the inside dimensions were 10 ½″ x 10 ½″ and about 3″ deep.

Full transparency…I originally made this pie box WAY too big, so the images below may look a little…off. After I finished it, I decided to take it apart and trim it down smaller. So in the tutorial below, I’m sharing how I should have made it from the start.

The overall outside dimensions of the box are about 3 ¾″ x 11 ½″ x 11 ½″.

How to Build a Scrap Wood Pie Box

If you prefer to watch, here’s a quick video tutorial, but I’ve also got the step by step instructions below.

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw (optional)
  • Table Saw
  • Brad Nailer
  • Drill & 1″ Forstner Bit
  • Cricut Explore (optional for stencil)

Materials:

  • Scrap ½″ Plywood
  • Scrap ¼″ Plywood
  • Wood Glue
  • Brad Nails
  • Cricut Vinyl & Transfer Tape (optional for stencil)

Step 1: Cut Pie Box Sides

First, I cut my ½″ plywood down to give me four sides to make my box like you see in the image below.

I cut my back and side pieces the same width (so they’ll end up being the same height once assembled), but I cut the front piece (shown at the bottom) a little smaller to allow for a sliding lid later.

Four pieces of ½" plywood laid out on concrete floor with dimensions labeling each piece

Next, I used my table saw to cut a ¼″ dado ¼″ deep ¼″ from the top edge of my two sides (the two 10 ½″ long pieces of plywood).

This dado will be where the sliding lid goes into later.

Piece of ½" plywood with ¼" dado cut ¼" from edge

TIP: You don’t need a dado blade to cut a dado on a table saw. You can just set the blade height to ¼″ and make multiple passes, adjusting the rip fence a little each time, until the slot is ¼″ wide.

OR, you could also use a router and a ¼″ straight bit to cut the dado as well.

Step 2: Assemble Pie Box

Once the pieces for the box were cut, I glued and brad nailed them together at the corners to make the box.

Like you see below, the dadoes on the side pieces should be toward the top, and the shorter front piece should sit right below them.

Wooden pie box sides assembled on workbench with brad nailer

I didn’t edge band the plywood here, but you absolutely can if you’d like.

Next, I cut a piece of ¼″ plywood to fit over the bottom of the box. I glued and brad nailed this piece around the edges.

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing ¼" plywood bottom panel onto pie box

Step 3: Cut Sliding Top

The last piece was the sliding lid, so I cut a piece of ¼″ plywood to slide into the dadoes on the sides of the box.

Scrap plywood pie box with sliding lid cut to size and slipped into dadoes on sides of box

To be able to open the lid when it’s closed, I drilled a 1″ diameter hole toward the front in the center. If you didn’t want to drill a hole, you could also glue on a knob, instead.

And at this point, the box is complete, so you can stop here if you’d like. But I decided to add a little extra design to the lid as you’ll see in the next step.

Step 4: Add Optional Pie Box Label

You can add a design to the lid of the pie box several ways–you can hand paint one, use premade stencils, vinyl decal, laser engraving, stickers, etc.

For mine, I designed a stencil in Cricut Design Space to fit on my lid (I created this with a circle shape, some text, and a pie shape–super simple) and cut it out using my Cricut Explore on permanent vinyl.

Cricut vinyl stencil cut out with handmade pie logo

Then, I used transfer tape to apply this stencil onto my pie box lid.

Shara Woodshop Diaries removing transfer tape from wooden pie box lid stencil

And I used a water based wood stain (Minwax Pecan) to stain over the stencil. I’ve used this Cricut vinyl as a staining stencil on SEVERAL past projects, and it works great!

Check out more stenciled projects:

  • Custom serving boards
  • Scrap Wood Tic Tac Toe Game
  • Game Board Coffee Table
  • Wooden Sled

But the trick to clean stain lines is using WATER BASED WOOD STAIN. Oil based stain can work, but is much more likely to bleed under the stencil edges.

RELATED: How to stain wood

Shara Woodshop Diaries staining over vinyl stencil on wooden pie box lid

I allowed the stain to dry a few minutes, then removed the vinyl to finish my pie box.

This turned out so cut for such a simple scrap wood project. If you didn’t want to use this for pie, it also makes a great carrier for cookies, cake, even casseroles.

Completed wooden pie box with sliding lid closed on table

How cute would this look on the dessert table at your next get together, though? You could even make multiple lids with different labels depending on what you put inside!

Wooden pie box with sliding lid removed. Cherry pie inside with a slice cut on a plate

Looking for more scrap plywood projects?

Enjoyed this scrap plywood project, but looking for more ideas? I got you! Click on the images below to check out these popular scrap wood projects:

Wall Mounted Shoe Rack
Floating wall shelves from scrap wood with industrial details
Scrap Wood Wall Shelves
Scrap Wood Cart
Mug Holder Shelf
Battery Charging Station

If you’d like to save this project for later, don’t forget to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing closed lid on pie box at top and open pie box with pie inside on bottom with text "how to build a scrap wood pie box"

Until next time, happy building!

How to Build a Corner Wall Cabinet

January 22, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m showing you how to build a basic corner wall cabinet!

If you’ve ever considered building your own DIY cabinets for your kitchen, bathroom, garage, or…anywhere, really, you may have wondered how to handle the corners.

DIY corner wall cabinet hung on wall with shelf and door open

Corner cabinets can be found in several different types, sizes and styles. But a diagonal shaped corner cabinet like this one is a common option with upper cabinets.

The shape allows you to install regular wall cabinets on each side, while also fully utilizing the corner space for storage.

If you haven’t already, I encourage you to check out this post for the basics of building wall cabinets. It covers some additional details and extra tips on general cabinet building.

But if you’re looking to build a diagonal corner cabinet like this one, I’ve got the plans and tutorial below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This type of cabinet can utilize shelves OR could also be used with a lazy Susan kit instead.

The diagonal shaped corner cabinet is more common for wall cabinets than base cabinets.

Corner wall cabinet painted grey hung on wall in corner with door closed

But this same concept can be used for a base cabinet, just keep in mind that the diagonal shape will take up some extra floor space.

Cabinet Sizing Options

This type of diagonal shaped corner wall cabinet is typically found in two sizes: a 12″ and a 15″. These dimensions refer to the depth of the cabinet sides (the sides that will butt up to adjacent wall cabinets).

Because most standard wall cabinets are 12″ deep, the 12″ size is designed so that all of the cabinets butt together and are flush across the front.

Diagram showing flush corner cabinet next to other corner cabinets

But, the 15″ size is designed to be deeper than your adjacent cabinets so that it sticks out a little further. This adds more storage space, but can also add some dimension to your cabinet design.

diagram showing deeper corner cabinet with shallower wall cabinets installed on each side

Sometimes the deeper cabinets are made taller than the adjacent wall cabinets like you see in the diagram above, but not always.

That said, you can customize your corner cabinet height, depth, or width to fit your needs, but these are the two most common sizes. I’ve included printable plans for both size options below.

Learn more about upper cabinet sizing standards here.

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • 7 ways to build a cabinet door
  • How to install adjustable shelves
  • How to install concealed hinges

Enjoy DIY projects and woodworking plans? Sign up for priority access for the latest posts on Woodshop Diaries!

How to build a corner wall cabinet

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

YouTube Thumbnail image for how to build a corner wall cabinet video

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable corner wall cabinet building plans available here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

Check out this post for the top ten tools I recommend for cabinet building

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw
  • Plywood Cutting Guides (Kreg Rip Cut & AccuCut)
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Brad or Finish nailer
  • Concealed Hinge Jig
  • Shelf Pin Jig
  • Miter Saw
  • Table Saw (optional)

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¾″ plywood *
  • (1) 4’x4′ sheet ½″ plywood *
  • (1) 1x3x8 boards
  • Materials for door (depends on how you want to make them **)
  • 1 ¼” pocket hole screws (50 count box)
  • 1″ pocket hole screws (50 count box)
  • (25) 1 ¼” wood screws
  • 1 ¼” long brad or finish nails
  • (4-5) 2 ½″ wood screws (to install)
  • Wood glue
  • (1) pair face frame 1 ¼” overlay (or other as desired) concealed hinges
  • (6-12) Shelf pins
  • Edge banding (optional)

*I recommend using hardwood plywood for this build–I used birch here. Learn how to use the best plywood for your project here.

**You can build your doors hundreds of different ways using hundreds of different materials. I built mine using 1x3s for the door frames and ¼″ plywood for the door panels. For more information, see 7 ways to build a cabinet door.

Step 1: Cut the Cabinet Box Pieces

I started this project by cutting down seven plywood pieces to build the box:

  • (2) side panels (¾″ plywood)
  • (2) top & bottom panels (¾″ plywood)
  • (1) back corner panel (¾″ plywood)
  • (2) back panels (½″ plywood)

The most challenging part of this build is simply the fact that some of these edges need to be cut with a 45 degree bevel.

So I used my circular saw and Kreg Rip Cut to cut a strip off my ¾″ plywood sheet with a beveled edge. I cut two pieces from this strip to use as my cabinet sides.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting plywood with Kreg Rip Cut with circular saw beveled 45 degrees

I discuss some cabinet sizing tips and more details in the video here. And you can also find the full cut diagram and cut list detailed in the printable plans.

I also cut two ½″ plywood panels for the backs and a ¾″ plywood corner piece with both edges beveled 45 degrees. This will make more sense in the next step.

Then, I cut two ¾″ plywood squares to use for my top and bottom pieces. Because of the shape of this cabinet, the front and back corners need to be trimmed off like shown below.

Bottom panel of DIY corner wall cabinet with pocket holes drilled for assembly

After I had all my pieces cut to size, I drilled pocket holes into the ends of my top and bottom pieces like you see above. And I also drilled pocket holes along one edge of my two back panels.

RELATED: Learn how to use pocket holes in DIY projects

Shara Woodshop Diaries sanding plywood parts to assemble corner wall cabinet

Then, I sanded each piece before assembling.

Step 2: Assemble the Corner Cabinet Box

I assembled these pieces using a combination of pocket holes and just basic wood screws.

First, I attached the top and bottom panels to one of my side panels using pocket hole screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries driving pocket hole screws to attach top panel to corner cabinet box

Then, I added one of the ½″ plywood back panels. First, I secured this to the side panels with pocket hole screws. Then, I added some wood screws to secure it to the top and bottom panels as well.

TIP: A standard size pocket hole jig can work if you’re careful, but I recommend using a Kreg Micro Jig for these ½″ plywood pieces with pan head pocket hole screws. The smaller holes and screws are less likely to cause splits.

Learn how, when, and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing back panel of corner cabinet box to bottom panel on workbench

Next, I added the back corner piece (the one with two beveled edges) with wood screws at the top, bottom, and down the edge.

Shara Woodshop Diaries driving screws to assemble DIY corner cabinet box

Then, I could add the second back panel and second side to complete the corner cabinet box. I hope all those pieces cut in step 1 make a little more sense now that the box is together.

Completed DIY corner cabinet box assembled on workbench

Before adding the face frame, I went ahead and drilled shelf pin holes along the inside of both side panels and along the back corner piece (see video for more details).

This will allow for adding adjustable shelves to the cabinet later. If you didn’t want to add shelves, you can totally skip drilling the shelf pin holes.

RELATED: How to drill shelf pin holes for adjustable shelves

Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling shelf pin holes into sides of cabinet to install adjustable shelves

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this project here.

Step 3: Install Face Frame

Now that the box is together, it’s time to add the face frame to cover the front. I cut all of my face frame pieces from 1×3 boards, but the vertical pieces will need to be cut with a 45 degree beveled edge.

I found it easiest to cut these bevels on the table saw, but you could use a circular saw or a router as well.

Then, I cut two pieces of 1×3 for the top and bottom and test fit these over the front of the cabinet to make sure they fit well.

Shara Woodshop Diaries test fitting beveled face frame pieces onto front of corner cabinet box

PRO TIP: When building and attaching face frames, it’s better to err on the side of a little too big than a little too small. If your face frame overhangs the edges of your cabinet a little, that’s okay! But if it doesn’t completely cover the front of your cabinet, you’ll have gaps when you install and it will be difficult to hide.

Once I made sure the fit was good, I drilled pocket holes in the ends of the top and bottom pieces and assembled the frame using pocket hole screws.

A standard size pocket hole jig can work if you’re careful, but I recommend using a Kreg Micro Jig for these thin face frame pieces with pan head pocket hole screws. The smaller holes and screws are less likely to cause splits.

Learn how, when, and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig here.

Then, I glued and nailed this face frame onto the front of my cabinet box.

Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing face frame onto front of corner cabinet box

At this point, the cabinet box is complete, so I went ahead and puttied over the nail holes and joints, and gave it a final sanding. Then, I painted it.

Learn how to paint DIY furniture and cabinets without a sprayer here.

Step 4: Hang Cabinet & Add Shelf

Once the cabinet was painted, I hung it on the wall using 2 ½″ wood screws through the back panels and into the wall studs.

Learn more about upper cabinet installation here.

Then, I remembered I needed to cut my shelf. The shelf here should match the shape of the top and bottom pieces of the cabinet, but needs to be just a bit smaller.

So I cut a ¾″ plywood square about ¼″ smaller in each direction than I cut my top and bottom panels. Then, I trimmed the front and back corners off.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting corner off shelf panel using Kreg AccuCut and circular saw

I edge banded the front edge of the shelf, but that’s totally optional. Learn how to apply edge banding here.

Then, I test fit this shelf into the cabinet using shelf pins. I just added a single shelf, but you can certainly add more than one if you wanted.

Corner cabinet hung on wall with shelf installed on shelf pins

Step 5: Build and Install Door

Now, all that’s left is adding the door. You can build your cabinet door a hundred different ways and in a hundred different styles. So feel free to use whatever cabinet door building method you prefer.

You can find 7 ways to build a cabinet door here. And of those would work for this project. I used method number 4 to build this door.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling cabinet door on workbench

Since this cabinet has a face frame, building and installing a door in this case is the same as any other regular type of wall cabinet. You don’t need to use any special hinge or do anything special with the door.

The only thing you have to keep in mind here is to leave plenty of clearance on both sides for the doors if you plan to add adjacent cabinets on each side. I recommend leaving at least ½″ face frame reveal when sizing this door.

You can find all the dimensions, details, and diagrams in the printable plans here.

Once the door was built, I painted it to match the cabinet, then installed it onto the cabinet with 1 ¼″ overlay face frame hinges.

Learn how to install concealed hinges here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing cabinet door onto cabinet with concealed hinges

And with that, this corner wall cabinet is finished! This cabinet works well as a stand alone cabinet, but you can also butt regular wall cabinets up to it on each side.

I intentionally leave some room at the top of my upper cabinets like you see below so that there is room to add crown molding or other trim around the top once all the cabinets are in place. So if you want to dress it up a bit, go for it!

Completed DIY corner wall cabinet hung with door closed in corner of workshop

Looking for more DIY Cabinet Building Projects?

You might find these posts helpful for additional information on building your own cabinets. Click on the images below to read more.

How to Build Base Cabinets
How to Build Wall Cabinets
How to build a Corner Cabinet
How to Determine Cabinet Door Size
7 Ways to Build a Cabinet Door
How to Install Cabinet Hinges

If you enjoyed this post, be sure to save it for later by pinning or sharing to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing corner cabinet diagram at top and completed corner cabinet on wall at bottom with text "how to build a corner wall cabinet"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

DIY Free Little Pantry

January 8, 2026 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a blessing box for your local community.

Not familiar with the term “blessing box?” These simple outdoor storage boxes are also called free little pantries or community pantries.

Shara Woodshop Diaries standing next to community pantry on post with door open

And sometimes, you even see them used for books (instead of food) and called free little libraries, too.

Basically, they’re an outdoor storage box that can be filled with items to help those in need (think…food, diapers, and other essentials).

This is such a great project if you’re looking for tangible way to engage with and give back to your local neighborhood.

I’m showing you how to build your own in the post below, so let’s dive in and get building.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building a free little pantry

Free little pantries are an excellent project to do as a team or group! I encourage you to build one with a friend, a club, a classmate or a neighbor. Together, you can find a place to put it and help keep it stocked.

If you’re looking for other free little pantry designs, I’ve also shared two previous ones here:

  • DIY Basic Outdoor Pantry
  • DIY Small Blessing Box

Overall Dimensions

Of the free little pantries that I’ve built in the past, this one is the largest. You can modify it to be smaller if you’d like, but as is, the box (including roof) is approximately 28″ wide x 25 ⅞″ deep x 38 ¼″ tall.

Dimensional diagram of free little pantry project showing overall dimensions

The post is about 57″ tall, so once placed in the ground, the pantry will be roughly 33″ off the ground.

Choosing your materials

Since this is an exterior project, it’s best to use materials that are rated for exterior use. For longest life, choose a lumber option that will hold up to the elements–like treated wood, cedar, red wood, etc.

You can use untreated wood for this project, but keep in mind it should be completely sealed (painted) and may not last as long.

This project calls for “¾″ plywood”, but often treated plywood and/or exterior sheathing will come in undersized options. I recommend going no thinner than 23/32″ thickness.

Make sure to use exterior rated screws & hardware, and exterior rated wood glue.

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to Build a Community Blessing Box

I’ve included the step by step building instructions below along with printable building plans. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Check out the video for tips, visuals, and some extra clips from behind the scenes!

YouTube thumbnail for free little pantry video

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable community pantry building plans here:

**100% of proceeds raised from this plan go directly to restocking our local community pantry to help those in need.

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Circular Saw
  • Miter Saw
  • Cutting Guides (Kreg Rip Cut and AccuCut)–optional
  • Table Saw
  • Drill/Driver
  • Brad Nailer
  • Dowel Jig
  • Clamps

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¾″ or 23/32″ treated or exterior rated plywood/sheathing
  • (1) 4x4x8′ treated post
  • (3) 1x6x6′ treated fence pickets (for trim)
  • (2) 1x3x8′ treated OR cedar boards (for door)
  • Wood Glue (exterior rated)
  • 1″ brad nails
  • 1 ¼″, 2″, 2 ½″ & 3″ exterior wood screws
  • (2) 1 ½″ x 3″ butt hinges
  • (1) Chest Door Latch
  • (1) 24″ x 30″ sheet ⅛″ thick acrylic or plexiglass
  • Exterior rated caulk/silicone
  • (20) ½″ stainless steel screws
  • Roofing material (optional)

Step 1: Assemble the Box

The main box of this pantry is built from ¾″ (or 23/32″) plywood. So I cut two side panels and a bottom panel from my sheet.

I cut the side panels so that they had a 22.5 degree slope from the front to the back. That way, the roof will slope to shed rain.

I assembled these pieces together using wood glue and 2″ wood screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling free little pantry box on workbench with screws

Then, I cut another piece of plywood to cover the back side of the box. The top edge should be beveled 22.5 degrees to match the sides.

I secured this piece using wood glue and 2″ wood screws as well.

Shara Woodshop Diaries screwing back panel onto community pantry box on workshop floor

You can find all the dimensions, cut diagrams, and full cut list in the printable plans here.

Step 2: Add Shelves & Roof

Next, I added the shelves to the inside of the box. You can customize the shelves here however you’d like, but I cut one larger top shelf, a divider, and a smaller bottom shelf like you see below.

This allows for larger packages at the top and smaller items like canned goods at the bottom. I’m hoping this helps utilize the inside space most efficiently.

I secured each shelf using 2″ wood screws. If you wanted, you could use pocket holes and screws here, instead.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing shelves into free little pantry box with screws through side panel

Once the shelves were installed, I cut and installed the roof on top. I cut this roof rather large so that it would overhang each side to shield it from rain.

I carefully screwed this roof panel into the side and back panels through the top.

Shara Woodshop Diaries driving screws through plywood panel to secure roof to blessing box

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this community pantry here.

Step 3: Trim Sides & Paint

Now it was time to add the trim. This trim helps dress up the box a little, but will also help cover the seams to hopefully protect it from moisture/weather.

You can use 1×2 or 1×3 boards for the trim, but I found 1×6 treated fence pickets to be a significant savings (those things are cheap!).

So I ripped a few fence pickets into 2 ½″ wide strips on the table saw (which is the same width as a regular 1×3), then cut these to fit around the sides and back of the box.

Shara Woodshop Diaries using brad nailer to secure trim pieces to back of community blessing box on workbench

I glued and brad nailed these pieces in place. But for the front side, I cut a piece of scrap ¾″ plywood with the top edge beveled 22.5 degrees (to match the roofline).

I glued and screwed this piece across the front at the top.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing top front trim piece to blessing box with screws

After the trim was installed, the pantry box was ready to paint. So I carefully caulked all the joints, seams, and over all exposed screw head to seal everything well.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying caulk to trim on side of free little pantry box on workshop

Then, I primed and painted the entire box (inside, outside, top, and bottom) with a high quality outdoor primer and paint. Make sure the paint you use is for use outdoors. If not, it can quickly start to peel when exposed to the elements.

I used Sherwin Williams Latitude Paint in Evergreen Fog.

Shara Woodshop Diaries rolling paint onto side of community blessing box on workbench with paint roller

ROOF COVERING: Once painted, if you’d like, you can add an additional roof covering. Sheet metal, corrugated plastic, or shingles are all great options. This isn’t NECESSARY, but it can help protect the roof from the weather.

Because this is such a small roof, I recommend checking with friends, family or neighbors to see if anyone has some small scraps you could use. We ended up using some shingles from a local friend who had just built a shed and had some roofing material leftover.

Step 4: Assemble the Door

While the paint dried on the cabinet, I moved on to assembling the door. For the door frame, I opted for some cedar 1×3 boards.

I cut four pieces to build a door that would cover the front of the pantry cabinet completely. Then, I assembled this frame using wood glue and dowels.

RELATED: How to use a dowel jig

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling door frame with dowel pins

I clamped the frame together while the glue dried. Then, I carefully cut a piece of ⅛″ acrylic to fit over the opening.

You can cut acrylic sheets using a fine finish blade on your circular saw. Just be careful to support the piece while cutting as it can crack easily.

To seal between the acrylic and the door frame, I applied a bead of clear silicone before securing the acrylic to the back side of the door frame using stainless steel screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing acrylic panel to door frame using screws from the back side

TIP: I predrilled pilot holes through the acrylic along all four sides to be able to screw this on. Just like with cutting, make sure the piece is properly supported underneath (a scrap piece of wood under where you’re drilling works well) when drilling to prevent cracks.

Step 5: Build the Post & Supports

This free little pantry build will set on top of a post in the ground, so next, I assembled the post and supports.

Because this box is rather large and heavy, I wanted to add supports on each side of the post to distribute the weight.

So from my 4×4 treated post, I cut four pieces about 12 ¼″ long with ends mitered 45 degrees. I screwed one on each side of the post so that they were all flush across the top.

Shara Woodshop Diaries driving screws through 4x4 post supports on workbench

Then, I dug a post hole about 24″ deep where I wanted my pantry to go. Make sure to have all utilities marked before digging!

I set my post with concrete, making sure it was level. I didn’t want a lopsided pantry post ha!

Shara Woodshop Diaries checking that post in the ground is level with a 2 ft level

I set my posts using dry concrete mix. The moisture from the ground and any upcoming rains will cause it to set up. However, you could use wet concrete mix, post foam, or other methods as desired to set your post.

I allowed a few days for the concrete to set up well so the post was sturdy before moving on.

Step 6: Install Free Little Pantry

One the post was set, centered the pantry box on top and secured it through the bottom panel and into each support and the center post with 2 ½″ wood screws.

And finally, I added the door with a pair of small butt hinges.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing door to side of free little pantry with cabinet butt hinges

It’s important that the door stay securely closed when not in use to prevent wind, weather, and critters from getting inside. So I added a chest door latch on the opposite side of the door as the hinges.

Completed DIY free little pantry installed onto post with door open and food inside

And with that, this free little pantry is ready to fill up and open to the neighborhood.

Free little pantry build--pantry installed onto post supports with door closed and latched

I’ve seen several of these have written on the side “leave what you can, take what you need.” And that’s truly what I hope this project can be about–a community project where people help when they can and get help when they need it.

If you’d like to build your own, you can find the printable building plans for this project here. All proceeds from the purchase of this plan go directly toward restocking this local community pantry.

Looking for more DIY Project Ideas?

Enjoyed this project, but looking for more ideas? Here are a few more DIY projects you will enjoy browsing:

DIY Coat Storage Cabinet
How to Build a Larder Cabinet
How to Build a Pantry Cabinet
DIY Blessing Box
DIY Outdoor Storage Box
DIY Outdoor Sofa

If you enjoyed this project and want to save it for later, be sure to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing dimensional diagram at top and Shara standing next to completed pantry at bottom with text " how to build a blessing box pantry"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

DIY Mobile Miter Saw Station with Storage

December 26, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a mobile miter saw station packed with practical storage.

My miter saw is one of my most used tools in the shop. Because of that, I love having it on a dedicated worksurface with plenty of support on each side.

Mobile miter saw stand with 8 drawers, a storage cabinet and an open cubby for vacuum

But, the only problem with a dedicated miter saw stand is that it can take up a lot of floor space.

So when I built this one, I focused on adding a variety of storage inside so that the floor space it takes up isn’t only used for the miter saw, but also for storing and organizing accessories, tools, and hardware in my shop space.

So, if you’re ready to build the ultimate mobile miter saw workbench (if I do say so myself!), I’m sharing all the details below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to Consider Before Building a Miter Saw Stand

When building your own miter saw station, table, or stand for your workshop, first, think about your work space layout and how often you use your miter saw.

  • How much space can you realistically dedicate to your miter saw?
  • Do you need it to be mobile?
  • What (if any) kind of storage do you want built into it?

Answering these questions can help you determine how to design or even if you need a miter saw stand at all.

Do I really need a miter saw stand?

You can absolutely use your miter saw without a stand. But, if you use it very often, having a dedicated stand is a really helpful upgrade.

A miter saw stand allows you to raise your saw to a comfortable working height and provides support for the pieces you are cutting. This makes your miter saw cuts more efficient, enjoyable, and safer.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting board on miter saw stand

Most miter saw manufacturers even offer various stand options that you can purchase along with your saw to at least raise it to a nice working level and provide some support for your pieces.

These types of stands are great for on the go as they typically fold up easily and can be carried around.

However, if you are normally using your saw in your workshop and not moving it around various job sites, building your own custom DIY miter saw stand is a great option that allows you add storage or dust collection to it as needed.

Benefits of having a mobile miter saw station

I’ve had a mobile miter saw station with foldable support wings for the last 8 years. I loved that stand, but recently decided to build this bigger one with additional storage.

There were several reasons why I decided to switch things up and some key benefits to this particular design:

  • It provides lots of storage. The 9 varying size drawers, open cubby and storage cabinet provide plenty of room to store saw blades, screws, tools, and other accessories to keep the shop organized.
  • Side supports make cutting long boards easier. Cutting long pieces on a miter saw can be tough when you don’t have enough support far enough from the blade. This stand provides 8′ worth of sturdy support across the top.
  • Mobility = Versatility. Since this miter saw station is on wheels, it’s ideal for small or shared workshops, like in garages. It rolls right up against the wall when not in use and can roll out when needed.
  • Safer cutting and better ergonomics. Making cuts at a comfortable working height vs on the floor allows for better control and saves on knee and back strain from bending over and squatting.
  • Flexibility for the future. I designed this stand so that the top supports sit on top of the main body instead of being “built in.” That way, if you ever change saws, they are easy to remove and adjust to match the new saw base height.

Dust Collection Options

I do not use a dust collection system with this set up. I allow the dust bag on the saw to catch what it can, and after each building project, I vacuum off the stand, roll it out of the way and sweep up the dust.

That’s just another benefit of it being mobile–it’s easy to roll out of the way and sweep under.

Miter saw station in workshop on caster wheels with vacuum and tools in the background

However, the open cubby in the stand is perfect for a shop vacuum that you can hook up to your miter saw, if you’d like.

DIY Miter Saw Stand Overall Dimensions

The overall dimensions of this miter saw stand are approximately 37 ¼″ tall x 96″ wide x 24″ deep.

Dimensional diagram of miter saw stand

*NOTE: Total height will vary based on the exact casters used. Overall height without casters is 32 ¾″

Helpful resources for this build

You may find these posts and guides helpful during the building process:

  • How to cut plywood sheets
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to install drawer slides
  • How to install concealed hinges
  • How to add adjustable shelves

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to Build a Mobile Miter Saw Station

I’ve included the step by step building instructions below along with printable building plans. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Check out the video for tips, visuals, and some extra clips from behind the scenes!

YouTube thumbnail for "how to build a mobile miter saw stand" video

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable mobile miter saw station building plans here:

Tools & Materials:

Tools:

  • Circular Saw
  • Miter Saw
  • Cutting Guides (Kreg Rip Cut and AccuCut)–optional
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Shelf Pin Jig
  • Concealed Hinge Jig
  • Drill/Driver
  • Table Saw (optional)
  • Brad Nailer or Stapler (optional)

Materials:

  • (3) 2x4x8′ boards
  • (4) 4’x8′ sheets ¾″ plywood
  • (2) 4’x8′ sheet ¼″ plywood
  • (1) 50 count box 2 ½″ pocket hole screws
  • (1) 250 count box 1 ¼″ pocket hole screws
  • (1) 1 lb box 1 ¼″ wood screws
  • (6) 4″ caster wheels
  • (8) pair of 20″ drawer slides
  • Shelf Pins
  • (2) Full overlay frameless concealed hinges
  • Brad nails or staples at least ¾″ or longer (optional)

To keep this project budget friendly, I used construction grade pine/spruce 2×4 boards for the base and “utility plywood” for the rest. This utility plywood was smooth and flat, but not very pretty.

Sanded pine would be another great option, as well as cabinet grade birch, maple or oak. But these options may be a little more expensive.

Step 1: Assemble Base Frame

To get started with this project, I built the base frame from 2×4 boards. Everything else for this stand will be built onto this frame, so it just makes sense to start here.

I cut five pieces of 2×4 to 17″ long and assembled them between two 8 ft 2x4s with pocket holes and screws to make my base.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes in woodworking projects

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling 2x4 miter saw stand base frame using pocket holes and screws on workbench

These five 2×4 pieces will “divide” my stand into four sections. I’ll use two sections for drawers, one for a shelf with a door and I’ll leave one open. You can adjust your section sizes however you’d like, but I’ve included all the dimensions I used in the plans.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable miter saw station building plans here.

If you wanted a bigger or smaller stand, simply adjust the size of the frame to fit your needs.

Step 2: Assemble Miter Saw Main Body

Once the 2×4 frame was together, I cut five ¾″ plywood panels for the sides and section dividers.

Then, I cut two more ¾″ plywood pieces to use as bottom panels in the middle two sections of my stand (these will be the cabinet and the open cubby).

RELATED: How to cut plywood sheets

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting plywood panel on workbench using Kreg Rip Cut and circular saw

I drilled pocket holes into both ends of the side and divider panels and secured them to my 2×4 frame (from step 1) using pocket hole screws. But, for the bottom panels, I just secured them to the frame with a screw at each corner.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing bottom panel into miter saw stand frame

TIP: This is really just a design preference, but I cut and installed all of the side, divider and bottom panels to the frame so that they were inset from the front edge about ¾″. So when I add the drawers and doors later, it’ll all be flush across the front.

Finally, I cut a ¾″ plywood panel for the top to 24″ x 96″. I placed this on my stand and secured with screws through the pocket holes I had already drilled in my side and divider panels.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing plywood top onto miter saw station

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans and full cut list here.

Step 3: Add Door and Shelf

In one of the middle sections (one with a bottom), I decided to add some shelves, so I drilled shelf pin holes on both sides of the cabinet. That way, I can place shelves inside to help me store some of my bulkier tools (like sanders!).

RELATED: How to add adjustable shelves to any project

Close up of drilling shelf pin holes into cabinet

Then, I cut another piece of ¾″ plywood to use as the door for this section of the stand. This will help keep dust out of this cabinet and also hide the clutter inside (which is always nice ha!).

Door installed onto mobile miter saw stand with concealed hinges

I installed this door to my stand using frameless full overlay concealed hinges.

Learn how to install cabinet doors using concealed hinges here.

Step 4: Install Miter Saw Top Supports

Next, I added what might be the most important part of a miter saw stand…the supports! These are what will support the boards while cutting and the key here is to ensure the supports are the same height as your miter saw base.

So, first, I measured the height of my saw base (measure your own as every saw’s height will vary) and got 4 ½″. My plywood was just under ¾″ thick, so I subtracted that to give me 3 ¾″.

Close up of tape measure showing height of miter saw base

I ripped five strips of ¾″ plywood to just a hair over 3 ¾″ (it was more like 3 13/16″) to use as my “risers.” That way, when I place my plywood on top, the total height will be 4 ½″ so it will match my saw base height.

TIP: It’s best to err on the side of the supports being just a little taller than the saw base vs the other way around. It’s much easier to shim up the saw to match the supports than to shim the supports to match the saw.

I secured these risers to the top panel of my stand with screws from the bottom side.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing miter saw support risers onto miter saw stand

I used three to make a support box on the left side (shown above) and the other two to make a support box on the right side of my stand (shown below). I made sure to leave enough room between them for my saw to fit.

Once the risers were secured, I cut and placed ¾″ plywood pieces on top of them with a few screws. Both sides of these tops need to be cut with a miter on the front corner to allow the miter saw to miter both directions without hitting anything.

Shara Woodshop Diaries screwing top panels onto miter saw support risers

I test fit my saw between the supports and used a level to ensure the saw height matched the supports. It’s important that these be flat all the way across.

Shara Woodshop Diaries checking miter saw level to supports on mobile miter saw stand

If the supports are too high, it can cause the pieces to pinch the blade when cutting and result in kickback. If they’re too short, the pieces will not be properly supported and can cause inaccuracies in your cuts.

These can be shimmed as needed (see step 7) for a perfect fit, but they should be pretty close at this point. After checking the fit, I removed the saw to finish the rest of the build.

Step 5: Add Storage Drawers

Next, I moved on to installing the drawers into my new stand. My old stand had six deep drawers, which provided a lot of storage.

But, because all the drawers were so big, I was constantly losing stuff in them. So for this stand, I opted for a combination of big and small drawer sizes. I added three shallow and two medium sized drawers in the left section of my stand and three deep drawers in the right section.

So I installed 20″ ball bearing drawer slides into these two sections. You can find all the dimensions and slide placements in the printable plans.

RELATED: How to install side mount drawer slides

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer slides into miter saw stand open cubby

Then, I assembled my five shallower drawer boxes for the left section of the stand.

RELATED: How to build a drawer box

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling shallow drawer box on workbench for miter saw stand

I installed these onto the slides in the stand. Learn how to install drawer boxes on drawer slides here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer slides to sides of drawer boxes

And finally, I added some simple ¾″ plywood drawer fronts using screws from inside the drawer box.

RELATED: How to install drawer fronts

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer fronts onto miter saw stand

And after the five were in on the left side, I repeated to add three deep drawers the same way into the right side of my miter saw stand.

Shara Woodshop Diaries removing drawer boxes from mobile miter saw stand

Then, I carefully removed (and labeled…trust me) the drawers so that I could flip it over to add the casters in the next step.

FYI: side mount drawer slides have little tabs on the sides that allow you to easily remove the drawer boxes from the cabinet. Then, you can simply slide them back in as needed.

Step 6: Attach Back and Caster Wheels

Because I wanted my miter saw stand to be mobile, I opted to add some heavy duty caster wheels to the base frame.

I flipped the stand on its back and screwed on 4″ caster wheels, one at each corner and two in the middle. Make sure to use caster wheels with brakes so that you can lock the miter saw stand in place while cutting.

Close up of installing caster wheels onto bottom of mobile miter saw stand using screws

Now, you may notice in the photos (and if you watched the video), that I installed the back panel onto my stand well before this step. However, having the back panel on made several parts of the build more difficult.

So in hindsight, this is where I’d recommend adding the back panel. I simply cut a piece of ¼″ plywood and stapled it over the back side of the stand.

Step 7: Secure Miter Saw & Finish

At this point, I replaced the drawers back into the cabinets and placed my miter saw back on top. After ensuring the miter saw was level, I screwed it to the stand.

Completed DIY mobile miter saw stand with shallow drawers on left, deep drawers on right, an open cubby for vacuum and a cabinet with shelf for storage

TIP: If you need to shim up your saw or your supports, you can to ensure it’s as flat as possible across the top for proper support.

Then, I finished up by adding some minimalist drawer pulls to the drawers and the door.

Mobile miter saw stand with storage in workshop

And now my new stand is ready to roll into action (I’m sorry, was that too cheesy?) and I’m excited to use it on many projects to come!

This extra storage and sturdy top supports are an awesome upgrade. If you’d like to build your own, be sure to grab the printable plans here!

Close up of miter saw stand door open to reveal shelf inside and deep drawer open to show storage

Looking for more workshop and garage storage ideas?

If you enjoyed this project and want to see more workshop and garage organization and storage projects, here are a few favorites!

Large Workbench with Storage
How to build a mobile Miter Saw Stand with storage drawers, and fold down extension wings
Mobile Miter Saw Stand
Small Space Mobile Workbench
Scrap Wood Cart
Workbench with Drawers
DIY Garage Cabinets
Tote Storage Cart
4 Tier Garage Shelf

If you enjoyed this project and want to save it for later, be sure to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing dimensional miter saw stand diagram at top and Shara with Miter saw stand at bottom with text "how to build the ULTIMATE mobile miter saw station"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

DIY Simple Angled Bookshelf

December 12, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a simple angled bookshelf from just a few basic 1×12 boards!

This shelf features a unique design that is eye catching, but simple and is great for extra storage in small spaces.

Shara Woodshop Diaries standing next to DIY angled bookshelf made from 1x12 boards

And while this makes an great bookshelf, it could also be useful for towels in a bathroom, shoes or clothes in a closet, or a little extra (and fun!) storage in any small space.

The angled shelves are easier than they look to assemble, so if you’re ready to build your own, I’ve got the how-to for you below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This is an excellent weekend woodworking project since it only takes a few hours to put together.

And most of that time is spent waiting for glue to dry, so you can spend a little time gluing up a few pieces, go watch a game or run an errand. Then come back and do the next section once that’s dry.

MATERIAL CHOICES

You can use just about any wood type you’d like for this project, but to keep it budget friendly, I recommend using pine/spruce/whitewood lumber from the local big box or building supply store. It only cost about $40 in lumber at the time of building (Dec. 2025).

White pine lumber on workbench

Or, if you wanted, you could rip ¾″ plywood strips to build this with as well. RELATED: How to cut plywood sheets

Either way, whether you rip your own lumber to size or buy precut boards, keep in mind the difference between nominal and dimensional lumber.

FINISHING

Depending on the type of finish you plan to use, you may consider finishing the pieces separately before assembling each step. For example, I used a water based stain for this project and I find it much easier to apply to individual pieces vs after everything is together.

So I stained each piece as I assembled each step. Learn how to stain wood here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries staining pine boards on workbench

However, you can choose to finish the entire project at once after it’s complete.

DOWEL ASSEMBLY vs SCREWS

I assembled the shelf section of this project (steps 1 & 2) using wood glue and dowels to avoid any visible joinery. But, I added the back and bottom using screws because these will be hidden in the finished project.

RELATED: How to use a dowel jig

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood glue to assemble project with dowels

If you don’t want to assemble with dowels, you can assemble this entire project using 1 ¼″ wood screws, instead. If/when using screws are used on this project, make sure they are countersunk and be sure to predrill pilot holes to prevent wood splits.

I highly recommend watching the video linked below for additional tips and visuals on assembly.

Overall Dimensions

The overall dimensions of this angled shelf project are approximately 12″ deep x 24″ wide x 60″ tall.

Overall dimensional diagram of angled bookshelf

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How To Build a Modern Angled Bookshelf

I’ve included the step by step building instructions below along with printable building plans. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Check out the video for tips, visuals, and some extra clips from behind the scenes!

YouTube Thumbnail of how to build a geometric bookshelf video

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable modern geometric bookshelf building plans here:

Tools & Materials:

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Drill/Driver
  • ⅜″ Dowel Jig (optional–see notes page)
  • Clamps

Materials:

  • (2) 1x12x8′ boards
  • (1) 1x12x6′ board
  • 1 lb box 1 ¼″ wood screws
  • (35) ⅜″ x 1 ½″ dowel pins (optional–see notes page)
  • Wood Glue

Step 1: Assemble “T” Shapes

One of the nice things about this project is everything is simply cut from 1×12 boards. So, first, I cut 8 pieces from my 1x12s to make the actual shelf parts. I cut seven pieces to 19″ and one piece to 13″.

These will be glued together into pairs to make “T” shapes. Before assembling, I went ahead and stained each piece separately with Minwax Water Based Semi Transparent Wood Stain in Aged Oak.

Shara Woodshop Diaries staining DIY angled bookshelf shelf boards on workbench with minwax water based stain

I assembled my shelf pieces using wood glue and dowels because I didn’t want to see any visible screws. BUT, if you wanted to assemble with wood screws, you absolutely can. It’s probably a bit easier that way.

I was using ⅜″ diameter x 1 ½″ long dowel pins. Since I’ll be drilling into the face of some boards and the ends of others, I was careful to adjust my drill depth so as not to drill my dowel holes THROUGH any boards.

So I drilled about ½″ deep into the face and about 1″ deep into the ends of my pieces. That way, the 1 ½″ long dowel will fit. FYI: The Kreg Doweling Jig has a built in drill depth gauge that’s pretty handy.

Close up of adjusting drill depth on Kreg Doweling Jig

I measured and marked the middle on one side of four of my 19″ long pieces and drilled dowel holes along this mark.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this project here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling dowel holes on face of 1x12 pin board with Kreg Dowel Jig

Then I adjusted my drill depth (see previous notes) and drilled corresponding holes into one end of my other three 19″ long pieces and into one end of my 13″ long piece.

Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling dowel holes into end of 1x12 board with Kreg Doweling Jig

Once all the holes were drilled, I could glue and clamp up four “T” shaped shelf pieces using dowels.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood glue to attach to 1x12 board with dowel pins on workbench

Three “T” shapes will have both pieces the same length, but one “T” shape will have the shorter 13″ long piece. There’s a reason for that, so hang with me!

Shara Woodshop Diaries clamping two boards into "T" shaped pieces for angled bookshelf

I clamped each of the four “T” shaped parts together and allowed to dry completely before moving on.

Step 2: Assemble Shelf Unit

Because this design was a bit “tricky,” I wanted to lay out my pieces to get a visual of where we were heading. So I pieced my “T” shaped from step 1 together on the workshop floor making sure the short piece was at the top.

Shara Woodshop Diaries laying out "T" shaped pieces to visualize DIY angled bookshelf on workshop floor

I remembered that the very bottom piece shown in the photo above needs to be trimmed so that the end is beveled 45 degrees. That way, it will sit flat on the bottom piece later.

So I trimmed that edge on my miter saw, then carefully marked on each board where I needed to drill the dowel holes to connect all of these pieces. I wanted to make sure I didn’t accidentally drill my dowel holes on the wrong side of the board!

See the video for more information.

Then, just like in step 1, I assembled these pieces using wood glue and dowels. So I drilled my dowel holes on each “T” shape and glued these together. And again, if you wanted to use wood screws instead of dowels, you absolutely can.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling angled bookshelf assembly with wood glue and dowels on workbench

It was a bit of an awkward glue up, but doable if you take your time. I made sure to check that each piece was clamped square before letting the glue dry.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this bookshelf here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries checking that boards are square on angled bookshelf build

TIP: Make sure the beveled end is at the bottom and the short piece is at the top!

Step 3: Assemble Shelf Back and Bottom

While the glue was drying on the shelf, I cut two more pieces of 1×12. One piece will be the bottom and one piece will be the back.

I measured and marked the center of each then aligned my marks and clamped together like shown below.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries driving screws to attach back and bottom of bookshelf

Up until this point, I used wood glue and dowels to assemble, but in this case, I used screws because they’ll be hidden in the finished project. So, I drove four screws through the back and into the bottom board.

Then, once the shelf unit was dry, I placed it on top to make sure everything fit well.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing shelf assembly on back and bottom boards of bookshelf on workbench

Step 4: Secure Geometric Shelf to Bottom and Back

I made sure the shelf unit was centered on the back piece, then secured it through the bottom with a few screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries driving screw to secure bottom of angled shelf

Once it was attached at the bottom, I carefully set the shelf upright, made sure it was centered (again) on the back piece, clamped, then secured each shelf with a screw through the back.

Shara Woodshop Diaries driving screws through back of bookshelf to secure each angled shelf piece

And with that, this simple angled geometric shelf is finished and ready for use!

If you’re ready to build your own, you can find the printable plans here.

Completed DIY angled bookshelf made from 1x12 boards stained with Minwax Aged Oak

I recommend placing the shelf on a flat, sturdy surface to prevent rocking. It’s also best to secure it to the wall to prevent tip over.

This fun little shelf can hold plenty of books or records and you can even use it for shoes, towels, or clothes.

Looking for More Bookshelf Builds?

Bookshelves are so fun because there are a hundred styles, sizes, and shaped you can build them! So I have several options to choose from if you’re looking for more DIY shelving ideas.

Here are a few of my personal favorite shelf builds you may enjoy browsing:

DIY Classic Bookcase
DIY Rotating Bookshelf
Modern Plywood Shelf
DIY Ladder Bookshelf
Geometric Box Bookshelf
Hidden Drawer Bookshelf

If you enjoyed the post and want to save it for later, don’t forget to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing Shara Woodshop Diaries with angled bookshelf at bottom and overall dimensional diagram at top with text "how to build a modern bookshelf"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

DIY Wooden Cross Trivets

November 27, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to make your own DIY wooden cross trivets!

These trivets are essentially two wooden blocks that interlock in a criss cross design to form an X.

Three wooden cross trivets on tabletop. Dutch Oven post resting on one of them

They’re unique in that they require very little wood to make, can be customized to just about any size, and when not in use, you can simply hang them up or toss them in a drawer for easy storage.

There are TONS of ways to make them, but I kept it simple by just using a miter saw (no table saw or router required!) and a little sandpaper.

So if you’re ready to build your own, I’ll show you how below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This project is simple and easy to customize to just about any size you’d like. You can also use just about any wood type you’d like but a solid hardwood is best. I used red oak for these.

Because these pieces interlock, a precise fit is important. So I recommend having some scrap wood handy to make a few test cuts, first, to make sure everything fits well.

You can cut these notches using a router or table saw, but I kept things simple and used a miter saw since it’s a bit more common and less intimidating.

DIY wooden cross trivets--one interlocked together and one set apart. Both tied together with leather cord

A simple scrap wood jig helps tremendously–see step 2.

These trivets can be made from almost any size material, but ¾″ square dowel, 1×2, or even 1x3s work really well. I show using ¾″ dowel in the steps below, but I also made some using 1×2.

The process is the same, the measurements just change a little to accommodate the difference in board width. I highly recommend watching the video below for more details on making the jig.

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to Make Wooden Cross Trivets

I’ve included the step by step instructions below. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Drill (optional)

Materials:

  • Scrap wood, 1x2s, or square dowels (see notes)
  • Scrap 1×4 for jig
  • Sandpaper
  • Leather cord (optional)

Step 1: Select Wood and Trivet Size

Like I mentioned in the notes above, these trivets can be made from many sizes of material, so first, I selected some small pieces from my scrap pile.

I ended up making a few different sizes, but I started with a ¾″ x ¾″ square dowel. I decided to make my trivets about 9″ long (this seemed to fit a dutch oven size pot about right), so I knew I needed at least 9″x2=18″ of board for each one.

Square red oak dowel close up with miter saw in the background

My piece was about 30″ long so I had plenty to work with. If you wanted to make your trivets bigger or smaller, you certainly can. This project is easy to customize.

Step 2: Make Jig for Miter Saw

To cut my notches, I used kind of a jig or a guide to help me. For this, I grabbed a piece of scrap 1×4 board.

Since I was making my trivets 9″ long, I want my notches where they intersect to be in the middle. So I marked 4 ½″ from the end of my 1×4 for the center. Then, I marked ⅜″ on each side of that and drew two lines.

Close up of scrap 1x4 board with marks for cross trivet notches

Why ⅜″? Because I was using a ¾″ wide piece of wood and ⅜″ is half of that. So my ¾″ piece should fit inside these lines I drew. If you were using a different size board, simply divide the width by 2 and mark that on each side of the centerline.

Then, I marked ⅜″ from the top of my piece–again, because it’s half the thickness. If your board is thicker or thinner, just mark half the thickness on the edge.

Shara Woodshop Diaries marking cut depth for notches in cross trivets

Then I adjusted my miter saw cut depth to ONLY CUT THIS DEEP. So in my case, I wanted it to only cut ⅜″ deep into my piece.

Once I had my miter saw set up, I started cutting into my 1×4 piece. I cut just inside the two lines I drew, then I cut out everything in between.

Close up of miter saw cutting notch in scrap wooden trivet jig

NOTE: Once cut, the trivet piece (in my case, the ¾″ square dowel) should fit snuggly into the notch.

Step 3: Cut Notches

Now, I could use the 1×4 as a jig. I aligned my blade with one edge of the already cut notch, then aligned the end of my square dowel with the jig and cut.

Then, I aligned my blade with the other edge of the notch on the jig and cut again on my square dowel. This “outlines” the notch I need to cut. I did this for both ends of my square dowel.

Close up showing end cut marks on trivet board in miter saw

Then, I made multiple cuts to cut out everything in between these “outlines” on each end of the board. If the notches are a little rough on the bottom, that’s okay–we will fix that later.

Close up of miter saw cutting notch in square dowel to make wooden trivet

Step 4: Cut Trivet Boards to Length

Once I had my notches cut on both ends of my trivet board, I adjusted my miter saw cut depth again back to a full cut and cut 9″ off each end of my board to give me my two trivet pieces.

Close up of miter saw cutting square dowel

Step 5: Finish and Install Optional Rope

I used some 80 grit sand paper on a small scrap block and sanded the bottom of my notches on each piece nice and smooth.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries sanding notch in cross trivets on workbench

Then I made sure my pieces fit snuggly together, interlocking at the notches.

Shara Woodshop Diaries interlocking wooden cross trivet boards to make an X

You can leave the trivet pieces as is, but I thought it would be neat to tie them together. So I clamped them together and drilled a hole through each on one end.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling hole in ends of trivet boards to install leather cord

Then, I tied a knot and ran some small leather cord through the holes. Now the pieces can detach but stay together.

Shara Woodshop Diaries tying leather cord through holes on trivet pieces

After sealing with some Walrus Oil Furniture Butter, these simple trivets were ready to use!

I ended up making a few sizes of these–the process was the same, just the measurements changed slightly to match the width of the pieces. Square dowels and 1x2s both worked great!

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing dutch oven pot on wooden cross trivet
DIY wooden cross trivet unlocked laying on tabletop

Looking for More DIY projects for your next Party?

Enjoyed this project and looking for more? Here are a few more fun projects that are easy to build and would work perfectly at your next gathering:

DIY Cake Stand
Cup Holder with Marker
DIY Dinnerware Caddy
Tea Box with Mug Holder
Cutting Board Drink Coasters

Enjoyed this project and want to save it for later? Be sure to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

DIY wooden trivet pinterest collage image--trivet in two pieces at top and trivets with dutch oven at bottom with text "how to make a wooden cross trivet"

Until next time, happy building ????

DIY Utensil Holder for Party

November 27, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a simple utensil caddy for plates, napkins, and cutlery.

This is perfect for dinner parties and get togethers and the best part is, you can make it from scrap wood!

wooden utensil caddy for disposable dinnerware with paper plates, napkins, and plastic cutlery in between dividers

It’s also nice to have everything stocked and neatly organized so you can set it out when needed and easily put it away when you don’t.

This may be a simple project, but it can help make hosting a meal a little easier so if you’d like to build your own, I’ve got all the details below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

One of the great things about having these items in a caddy is that it makes it easier for guests to grab what they need as they go through the line to get their food.

But, it also takes up vary little space on the countertop, too!

The overall dimensions of this project are approximately 8″ deep x 5 ¾″ tall x 14″ wide.

Overall dimensional diagram of wooden dinnerware holder with dividers

Because this project is so small, it’s an excellent scrap wood build. You only need about 30″ of 1×6 board and about 40″ of 1×4 board plus a small piece of ¼″ plywood scrap to build it.

So I encourage you to check your scraps before buying any new lumber. You might already have everything you need!

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to Build a Dinnerware Caddy

I’ve included the step by step instructions below. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable DIY utensil caddy building plans here:

Tools & Materials:

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Jig Saw
  • Brad Nailer

Materials:

  • 1×6 scrap board (30″ long)
  • 1×4 scrap board (40″ long)
  • ¼″ plywood scrap (8″ x 14″)
  • 1 ¼″ brad nails
  • Wood Glue

Step 1: Cut Utensil Caddy Box Pieces

First, I cut the front, back and sides of my utensil caddy box. I cut the two sides and the back from 1×6 boards and the front piece from a 1×4.

Then I kind of test fit the pieces together to make sure it seemed like a good size.

Shara Woodshop Diaries dry fitting wood pieces of dinnerware caddy together on workbench

You can customize the size of your caddy however you’d like, so there’s no one size this has to be. I just made mine large enough to fit the usual disposable dinner items–plates, napkins, forks, spoons, and knives.

I’ve included the dimensions I used in the printable plans for reference.

Since the back is taller than the front, I used a jig saw to cut a slant on both side pieces so they would slant from the back to the front.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting slants on sides of utensil holder pieces with jig saw

Step 2: Cut Caddy Dividers

Then, I cut pieces of 1×4 to divide out the box. Again, these don’t have to be any specific size. I just cut mine so they’d fit what I planned to store inside.

I test fit all my pieces together to make sure it would work well. Then, I sanded each piece well before assembling.

Test fitting dividers into wooden cutlery caddy before attaching

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this DIY utensil caddy here.

Step 3: Assemble Utensil Caddy Box

This project is VERY simple, but the one tricky part is deciding what order to assemble the pieces of the box so that there’s room to get the brad nailer in.

So first, I glued and brad nailed the left side and the front piece together like you see below.

Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing dinnerware caddy together on workbench

Then, I glued and brad nailed the napkin divider and cutlery dividers to the front piece of the caddy.

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing cutlery dividers onto dinnerware caddy

Next, I glued and nailed the plate divider between the left side and the napkin divider. I also made sure to attach these to the back of the cutlery dividers as well.

And finally, I could glue and nail the right side and back onto the caddy to finish up.

Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing back piece onto utensil holder on workbench

Grab the printable dinnerware caddy plans here.

Step 4: Attach Bottom

Now all that’s left was cutting a piece of ¼″ plywood to fit over the bottom of the caddy.

Once cut, I glued and brad nailed this panel in place.

Close up of brad nailing ¼" plywood panel onto bottom of wooden caddy

Step 5: Finish & Use Dinnerware Caddy

If you’d like, you can fill the nail holes with wood filler or a mixture of sawdust and wood glue. I personally didn’t fill mine–this project is more for function than looks so I wasn’t concerned with them.

I applied a food safe finish (cutting board oil works well!) to the caddy and now it’s ready to stock up with all the things!

Completed DIY wooden utensil holder caddy empty on tabletop

There’s plenty of room for plates, napkins and cutlery and this caddy makes it easy for guests to grab as they walk by. Having it all neatly organized makes this easy to put away until the next get together, too!

Completed DIY wooden dinnerware holder caddy full of plates, napkins, forks, spoons, and knives on tabletop

Looking for More DIY projects for your next Party?

Enjoyed this project and looking for more? Here are a few more fun projects that are easy to build and would work perfectly at your next gathering:

DIY Cake Stand
Cup Holder with Marker
Cutting Board Drink Coasters
DIY Serving Tray with Handles
DIY Christmas Candy Tray

Enjoyed this project and want to save it for later? Be sure to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing empty caddy at top and full caddy at bottom with text "how to build a dinnerware caddy"

Until next time, happy building ????

Easy DIY Modern Cake Stand

November 26, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build an easy wooden cake stand with modern legs.

This can work well in place of a traditional pedestal style cake stand but can also make a simple riser or serving platter, too!

DIY wooden cake stand with glass dome. Cake stand top is round with mid century modern legs

I actually used the same leg design that I’ve used on several mid century modern style furniture pieces in the past, but if you like a more traditional look, feel free to shape the legs a little more decorative.

Once it’s built, if you want to be extra fancy (well, I guess it’s not really THAT fancy, but it does dress it up a bit!), you can buy a simple glass dome to add on top!

This is a quick and easy project and I’m sharing exactly how to make it below. So let’s dive in and get building.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

Cake stands come in various sizes, so before building your own, I’d recommend considering how large you’d like yours to be.

First, think about the usual size of the cakes you make or buy–are they typically 10″, 12″, maybe even 16″ diameter?

I built this cake stand to be about 12 ¼″ diameter so it fits a 10″ diameter cake really well with enough room for a glass dome on top. It could fit a 12″ cake, too, but there wouldn’t be enough room for the glass dome.

Mid century modern style wooden cake stand with birthday cake. Piece cut from cake and placed on plate

So consider what size makes most sense for you and adjust as needed.

One other thing to consider is that the larger you go, the more stability you’ll need. So if you go larger, you may need to space the legs out a little more.

In this case, I used three legs, but you can absolutely add four legs if you’d like. It doesn’t require any additional material to add an extra leg to the stand. See step 2.

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to Build a Modern Wooden Cake Stand

I’ve included the step by step instructions below. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials:

Tools:

  • Jig Saw
  • Sander
  • Clamps

Materials:

  • (1) 1x6x6 board (or 1×6 scraps 17″ long)
  • Wood Glue
  • Food Safe Finish (cutting board oil works well)

Step 1: Glue up Wooden Panel

First, I cut three pieces of 1×6 to about 17″ long. I used alder wood for this cake stand, but any wood type you’d like to use would work fine.

Hardwoods like maple, walnut, and cherry are good options as that’s what many cutting boards are made with.

Once these pieces were cut, I glued and clamped them together into a solid panel.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing up wooden panel to make cake stand with

Learn how to glue up panels here. I allowed this to dry a few hours before removing them from the clamps.

Glued up alder panel--three 1x6 pieces glued together

Step 2: Sketch Top and Legs

I found the center of my panel and then searched the shop for a round object that was the size I wanted my cake stand top. I ended up finding that the top of a 5 gallon bucket lid was just about perfect, so I centered this on my panel and traced it.

Shara Woodshop Diaries tracing 5 gallon bucket lid shape onto solid wood glued up panel

This gave me a 12 ¼″ diameter circle for my cake stand top. If you wanted bigger or smaller, you can look around for an object to trace OR check out this post to see how to draw a circle any size.

Then, on the corners of this panel, I drew out three mid century modern style legs like the diagram below.

I used these same legs on this dresser, this nightstand, this dog bed, and this bookshelf (plus some other projects, too!).

Diagram of mid century modern legs

NOTE: Because I glued up 1x6s and 1x6s are 5 ½″, I adjusted the legs from the diagram above just slightly so that they were 5 ½″ wide total instead of 6″. That way, each leg could fit on a single board. This just made things easier if the glue up wasn’t perfectly aligned on the ends.

Glued up wood panel with circle traced in center and three modern legs traced on corners

I only drew three legs, but there are four corners, so you can fit a fourth leg on the panel if you’d like. Three legs worked out fine, but a fourth leg can help add a little more stability to the stand.

Step 3: Cut out Cake Stand Parts

Then, I used a jig saw to carefully cut out each leg. Make sure not to cut into the circle as you’re cutting on the corners.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting out modern legs with jig saw

After all three legs were cut out, then I cut out the circle from the middle of the panel.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting out wooden cake stand circle top with jig saw

TIP: When cutting shapes like this with a jig saw, I recommend using a fine finish wood blade and turning your jig saw’s orbital settings off or very low for best results.

After the legs and the top were all cut out, I sanded each piece well. You can use a router to round over the cake stand top edges if you’d like, but I just rounded them over a bit using the sander.

RELATED: How to sand wood

Step 4: Glue Legs to Top Plate

Next, I flipped my cake stand top upside down on the workbench and carefully measured and marked the center.

Shara Woodshop Diaries marking center of cake stand plate

Then, I glued the three legs on so that they were evenly spaced. This doesn’t have to be PERFECTLY precise, but should be close.

Essentially, I just applied a bead of glue to the top of each leg and placed them onto the bottom side of the cake stand top so that the corners all touched and my center mark was roughly centered in the triangle shaped hole where the legs meet.

Close up of gluing mid century modern wooden legs to bottom of wooden cake stand top plate

After I got them positioned where I wanted, I let the glue dry for an hour or two before moving on.

Step 5: Finish Cake Stand

To finish the cake stand, I applied some food safe oil (cutting board oil works great!) to seal it and now this simple cake stand is ready for the next celebration!

I used a glass dome from an old glass cake stand, but you can buy glass domes in various sizes new, sometimes you can find them at thrift stores, or you can even use a large glass mixing bowl.

Modern wooden DIY cake stand with three legs and glass dome on top

But even without the glass dome, this wooden cake stand makes the perfect pedestal to display cake, cookies, pie or whatever else you deem worthy of “rising above” on the dessert table. *wink wink*

Cake stand with three modern legs with birthday cake on top

Looking for More easy DIY projects?

Enjoyed this project and looking for more? Here are a few more fun projects that are easy to build and would work perfectly at your next gathering:

Cup Holder with Marker
Cutting Board Drink Coasters
Easy Serving Board
Tea Box with Mug Holder
DIY Book Stand

Enjoyed this project and want to save it for later? Be sure to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing gluing legs to cake stand top on top and completed cake stand with glass dome at bottom with text "how to build a wooden cake stand"

Until next time, happy building!

DIY Party Cup Holder with Marker

November 24, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to make an easy cup holder with marker from scrap wood!

This is the perfect little project to add to the drink table at your next dinner party.

Shara Woodshop Diaries pouring water into red plastic cup. Wood block with red cups stacked and marker resting in hole drilled on side

I don’t know about your family (or friend) get togethers, but usually after everyone eats, there are a bunch of cups sitting around and no one knows whose is whose.

Inevitably, everyone ends up getting a new cup and someone goes looking for a marker so we can all write our names on them this time.

To save us all the hassle (and the extra cups!), I finally decided to make this super simple cup holder with marker so everyone can grab a cup and write their name right from the start.

I’ll show you how to make your own for your next get together in the post below!

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This is a REALLY simple project, but in the tools list (below), you’ll notice I listed a 4″ hole saw. I realize this isn’t a common tool in most toolboxes, so if you don’t have one, that’s okay!

Close up of side of hole saw reading 4" size

Essentially, you just use this to drill a hole for the cups to rest in (see step 1). So, if you don’t have one, you can draw a 4″ diameter circle and cut it out with a jig saw, instead.

And it doesn’t even have to be a circle–you could cut a 4″ square, too. As long as the cups can fit into the opening, it will work.

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to Build a Party Cup Holder

I’ve included the step by step instructions below. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials:

Tools:

  • Drill
  • Miter Saw (or any saw that can cut straight lines)
  • 4″ hole saw OR Jig Saw
  • ½″ Drill Bit
  • Clamps

Materials:

  • 1×6 scrap board (about 12″ long)
  • Wood Glue

Step 1: Mark and Cut Cup Holder

To get started, I grabbed a piece of scrap 1×6. My piece was roughly 20″ long, but you only need about 12″ for this project.

I marked 2 ¾″ from one end of the board like shown below. Then, I marked 2 ¾″ in from the sides of the board at that spot.

Why this distance? A 1×6 is actually 5 ½″ wide, so 2 ¾″ would be the center. Check out this post to learn more about understanding lumber sizing.

Shara Woodshop Diaries marking hole location on scrap 1x6 board

I clamped my board securely to the workbench, then used a 4″ hole saw to drill a hole centered on my marks.

Close up of 4" hole saw drilling hole in end of 1x6 board on workbench

If you don’t have a 4″ hole saw, that’s okay!! You can just draw a 4″ diameter hole and cut it out with a jig saw instead (see notes above). Not sure how to draw a 4″ circle? Learn how to draw a perfect circle any size here.

OR, you could also just cut a 4″ square–it doesn’t HAVE to be round. This is just the recess that the cups will sit into, so as long as they fit into the opening/hole, that’s all that matters.

Step 2: Cut and Glue Top and Bottom Together

Once the hole was drilled, I measured 5 ½″ from the end of the board and made a mark to cut along. Since a 1×6 is 5 ½″, this would give me a perfect square.

Close up of marking where to cut pieces to make cup holder

I cut at this mark on my miter saw, then cut another piece from the board the exact same length. This gives me two pieces 5 ½″ square, one solid and one with a hole.

Cutting 1x6 scraps on miter saw to build wooden cup holder

After sanding these two pieces, I carefully glued them together and clamped until dry.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood glue to attach party cup holder together

Once dry, I sanded the edges nice and flush and now I have my cup holder. I just need to add the marker holder.

Glued up blocks with hole drilled out the center for party cups

Step 3: Drill Marker Hole

From one corner, I measured about ¾″ in from both edges and drilled a hole about 1″-1 ¼″” deep.

This piece is 1 ½″ thick, so you want to drill fairly deep, but not all the way through.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling hole in cup holder to hold marker

I used a ⅝″ forstener bit for this, but I think ⅝″ was a little too big. My marker was pretty loose in this hole and didn’t stand upright very well.

If I had to do it over, I think I’d use a ⅜″ or ½″ diameter bit instead. If you’re not sure how big to go, drill a test hole in some scrap wood with different sized bits and see how your marker fits in them before drilling into the actual piece.

Step 4: Finish and Use

After drilling my marker hole, I sealed this with some food safe oil (cutting board oil works well!), and it’s ready for the next get together!

Completed wooden DIY cup holder with marker

This super simple little project is really handy for large gatherings so everyone can label their cup with their name as they grab it.

Looking for More easy DIY projects?

Enjoyed this project and looking for more? Here are a few more fun projects that are easy to build and would work perfectly at your next gathering:

Cutting Board Drink Coasters
Easy Serving Board
Tea Box with Mug Holder
DIY Serving Tray with Handles
4-in-a-Row Game

Enjoyed this project and want to save it for later? Be sure to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest image showing finished Diy cup holder with marker at top and Shara Woodshop Diaries pouring water into labeled cup at bottom with text "easy DIY cup holder with marker"

Until next time, happy building ????

DIY Shadow Box

November 6, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a simple DIY shadow box from scrap wood.

Shadow boxes are essentially “thick” picture frames that allow you to frame objects instead of just photos.

Simple 8x10 shadow box made from pine with a black painted back board

So they’re a great way to frame and display awards, keepsakes, and other sentimental items.

Shadow boxes are inexpensive to make (especially if you have a few scraps lying around), but can make incredibly meaningful gifts depending on what you put inside.

If you’re ready to build one, I’m sharing the how to below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This shadow box is easy to make. The only problem (which really isn’t a “problem”) is that you can make it just about any size depending on what you want to put inside. So the dimensions can vary.

First, you’ll need to figure out what you’d like to put inside and determine the height and width your box needs to be to fit it. You’ll need a piece of ½″ plywood and a piece of plexiglass (or acrylic) that’s roughly this size.

TIP: You can buy precut plexiglass and acrylic sheets online and at most big box or home improvement stores in several standard sizes (I used an 8×10 for this project). You just need a thin (⅛″ or thinner) piece for this.

Materials needed for DIY shadow box on workbench

Then, you need to determine how deep your box should be to fit what you’re putting inside. For my board, I used a 1×4 for my box and when completed, the inside depth was about 2 ¾″. If you need something deeper, opt for a wider board.

This board should be about 4 inches longer than the sum of your sides.

For example, I’m making an 8″ x 10″ shadow box, so I need my board to be at least 8+8+10+10=36″ long PLUS 4″ for wiggle room. So I cut my 1×4 to about 40″ long.

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to Build a Simple Shadow Box

I’ve included the step by step instructions below. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Table Saw
  • Miter Saw
  • Clamps
  • Drill/Driver

Materials:

  • 1×4 or other *
  • Plexiglass or Acrylic *
  • ½″ plywood scrap *
  • Wood Glue
  • Painters Tape
  • 1″ long wood screws

*Size of glass/acrylic, plywood and 1x board will depend on what size you make your shadow box. These can be made any size depending on what you’d like to put inside.

See notes above for tips on sizing.

Step 1: Cut Slots for Glass and Backer

First, I cut the 1×4 board that I planned to use for the sides of the shadow box to length. The length you need will vary based on the size box you’re making, but it should be a little longer than the sum of the four sides. See notes above.

I adjusted the table saw blade height to about ⅜″ and ran my board through so that it cut a groove about ¼″ from one edge. This will be the slot for the plexiglass, so I made sure it would fit into the groove.

Shara Woodshop Diaries test fitting acrylic sheet into groove cut on 1x4 board

TIP: If your plexiglass is wider than your blade width, adjust the rip fence over slightly and run it through again to widen the slot until the plexiglass fits.

Then, I cut a second groove about ½″ from the OPPOSITE EDGE. After this second groove was cut, I adjusted the table saw one more time to carefully notch this out.

Close up of cutting groove out of shadow box board on table saw
Dimensional diagram of DIY shadow box cuts for acrylic and backer board

Now my board has a thin groove for the plexiglass to fit into and a notched corner that will hold the back panel. This will make more sense as it comes together.

1x4 pine board with groove cut for plexiglass and notch cut for back board to make shadow box

Step 2: Cut Shadow Box Sides

Next, I trimmed four pieces from my board to make the sides of my box. Each end should be beveled 45 degrees.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting board with beveled ends to assembly shadow box

NOTE: You can cut the beveled ends by laying the board flat and adjusting your miter saw bevel angle. OR, you can stand the board up and adjust the miter angle. Learn how to cut angles on a miter saw here.

Again, the lengths of your boards will depend on the size shadow box you’re making, so cut them to fit around your desired plexiglass size.

In my case, using an 8×10 plexiglass piece, I cut two pieces 8 ¾″ on the longest side and two pieces 10 ¾″ on the longest side. If you err, err on the side of a little too long than too short.

Cut your plexiglass piece to size (if it’s not already precut), and ensure the piece will fit into the grooves on the box and all the sides fit well together before gluing up.

Shara Woodshop Diaries test fitting boards around acrylic to make shadow box

TIP: I kept the protective film on my plexiglass piece until everything was glued up. This just helped protect it from accidental scratches.

Step 3: Glue up Shadow Box

After I knew everything would fit together well, I laid my boards out on my workbench end to end and with the outside facing up and applied painters tape along the joints.

I flipped this over and applied painters tape along the inside edges as well just to help avoid getting glue squeeze out everywhere. Then I applied wood glue to all my beveled board ends.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood glue to board ends to assemble shadow box on workbench

I carefully placed my plexiglass into the groove and wrapped my boards around it.

The plastic protective film on the plexiglass helps protect it from scratches during assembly, but make sure you pull this away from the edges when gluing up because you don’t want to accidentally glue this into the grooves, too.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries taping corners of shadow box on workbench

The painters tape helps hold the pieces together while you get everything in place, but I also clamped my pieces nice and tight while the glue dried.

Shadow box in clamps on workbench

Step 4: Install Back Panel

After the glue dried, I sanded the box well to remove any glue squeeze out and residue, then I cut a piece of ½″ plywood to fit into the groove on the back of my box.

Shara Woodshop Diaries test fitting back board into shadow box

After I made sure it would fit, before installing, I painted this piece black. This is completed optional–you could paint it white, yellow, blue, whatever. Or you could leave it natural wood or stain it. It’s totally up to you!

I also applied some Walrus Oil Furniture Finish to my box to seal it, then placed my back into the box and secured it at each corner with some 1″ wood screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries driving screws to install back board of shadow box

What to Add & How to Fill Your Shadow Box

Shadow boxes can be made for a WIDE assortment of items. Some people use it for awards, some like to put a flag inside, a jersey, a bouquet, a piece of jewelry, a book, etc.

I actually planned to put a pair of my grandpa’s old glasses and some photos of him inside this shadow box, but for these photos, I just staged it with a few trinkets from my college days.

To put things inside the box, simply remove the back panel. Some items can simply be placed inside, then put the back panel back on–like the sash and rope you see here.

But if needed, you can also tape, screw, glue, or string items onto the back as well. I used double sided mounting tape to attach this medal to the back before putting it back on the box.

Completed DIY shadow box with sash and graduation rope inside

Once filled, this box is ready to display on a table, a shelf, or, if desired, hung on the wall.

Looking for More easy DIY projects?

With the upcoming holidays, I’ve teamed up with my friend, Kati, from Houseful of Handmade and Anika, from Anika’s DIY Life to share some easy and fun gift ideas that you can make this season!

I’ve included their projects in the gallery below plus a few of my own (click on the images to see how to make each one).

Game Controller & Headphone Stand
Plywood Picture Frame
EASY DIY Picture Frames
EASY DIY Desktop Picture Frames
Picture Stand Blocks

Enjoyed this project and want to save it for later? Be sure to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest image of DIY shadow box with text "easy DIY shadow box"

Until next time, happy building!

DIY Accordion Coat Rack

November 5, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

https://woodshop.imarkdev.com/diy-accordion-coat-rack/

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a simple DIY accordion style rack from a single board and a dowel!

This simple, but unique rack is perfect for hats, coats, umbrellas, dog leashes, or even for stockings to hang during the holiday season.

DIY Accordion Coat Rack for Winter Coats and Hats

My favorite part about it is that it’s adjustable, so it actually moves like an accordion! So it can expand or contract to fit just about any size space.

And this accordion rack can make a great gift idea, too, especially for the hat collector in your life.

If you’re ready to build your own, grab your drill and a saw (that’s all the tools you need!) and I’ll show you how below!

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

I originally built this accordion style rack back in November 2019. And it’s been by my front door ever since (even after we moved!).

The original one was built out of scrap walnut 1x2s. But the one I’m sharing in the updated tutorial below is made out of scrap pine 1x2s (stained in Minwax Semi Transparent Water Based Stain in Pecan to look like walnut).

DIY wooden accordion hat rack with wooden rack and black pegs

So you can use any wood type you’d like for this. You can build it from a single 1x2x10 or just use some 1×2 wood scraps as the pieces needed are fairly small.

This rack can be added onto with more sections if you’d like to make a longer one. As is, this can extend to 36″+ wide.

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to make an Accordion Style Coat Rack

I’ve included the step by step instructions below. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable DIY hat rack building plans here:

Tools & Materials:

Tools:

  • Drill
  • Drill Bits
  • Miter Saw

Materials:

  • (1) 1x2x10 board (or scraps)
  • ⅞″ poplar dowel 36″ long (or other size dowel as desired)
  • (10) 2 ½″ wood screws
  • Wood Glue
  • D Ring hangers

Step 1: Cut 1×2 Accordion Rack Pieces

First, I used my miter saw to cut down 1×2 board into four long and four short pieces.

Shara Woodshop Diaries laying out accordion hat rack pieces on workbench

You can make these longer or shorter if you want a bigger or smaller coat rack, but I cut mine into pieces:

  • (4) 16″ long
  • (4) 8 ¾″ long

I actually cut these down from a scrap piece of wood that I took off a previous project. It was already stained, so that’s why my pieces are partially stained.

After cutting, I sanded and stained the edges and ends (in Minwax Water Based Semi-Transparent in Pecan) to match the existing color.

If you want your hat/coat rack to have a two toned look, I recommend finishing (paint, stain, poly) these pieces before adding the pegs in step 3.

Step 2: Drill Pilot Holes in Bottom Set of Boards

I divided my pieces in half–two long and two short pieces will go on the top and the other two long and two short pieces will go on the bottom of the rack.

So set two long and two short pieces for the top to the side to deal with later.

On the four BOTTOM pieces, I measured and marked ten locations–this is where the pegs will go.

Shara Woodshop Diaries marking peg locations on hat rack boards

Each board should be marked ¾″ in from each end and the long boards should also be marked in the center. Make sure all marks are ¾″ from the board edge so they’re centered on the 1×2.

Hole locations for DIY accordion coat rack

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this DIY accordion coat rack here.

I planned to use 2 ½″ long wood screws to attach everything in a later step, so for now, I found a drill bit just slightly larger than the shank of my screws, but not bigger than the screw head.

Then, I used that bit and drilled a through hole at all ten marks on my bottom boards.

Close up of drilling holes for back pieces of accordion hat rack

The screw should be able to drop into the holes, but the head should keep it from dropping all the way through the board.

WHY? Because, in order for the rack to move like an accordion, the holes on the back pieces need to be big enough that the screw, once installed, can freely pivot inside. But it needs to be small enough that the screw head holds the pieces together.

Step 3: Attach Pegs to DIY Accordion Coat Rack

I set my four bottom boards to the side for this step and pulled my top boards back out. I marked the exact same locations on my top boards as in step 2, but didn’t drill any holes.

Instead, I cut ten pieces of ⅞″ diameter dowel to 3″ long and sanded them well. Since these pieces are so small, I just hand sanded them.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries sanding dowels for rack pegs

Then, I spray painted these dowel pegs black. If you wanted to stain them or paint them a different color, feel free. I liked the classic black and wood look for this project.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying black spray paint to hat rack pegs

After the paint had dried, I CAREFULLY glued them to my top board pieces so that they were roughly centered on the marks from earlier.

They don’t have to be EXACTLY centered, but they should be pretty close. Be careful not to go overboard with the glue to prevent a lot of messy squeeze out around the sides.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing dowel pegs to 1x2 boards on workbench

NOTE: If you applied an oil based finish to the 1×2 boards, the glue may not stick very well.

The glue here just helps hold the pegs in place while you drive the screws in the next step. So if regular wood glue isn’t working, you can try a super glue instead.

Once all pegs were in position, I allowed them to dry well before moving on.

Step 4: Assemble DIY Accordion Coat Rack

Now that the holes are drilled in the bottom pieces and the pegs are glued onto the front pieces, it’s time to put them all together.

To attach, I flipped the top pieces upside down so the pegs were resting on the workbench. Then, I flipped the bottom pieces upside down on top of them and aligned the corners like shown below.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries predrilling pilot hole for accordion rack assembly

I found a drill bit just smaller than the shank of my screw and carefully drilled a pilot hole through one hole on the bottom piece.

After predrilling, I drove a 2 ½″ wood screw through the hole. This length screw will go through both 1x2s and about 1″ into the peg to help hold it in addition to the glue.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries driving screw to assemble accordion hat rack

I tightened it snug, then backed it out JUST A LITTLE. This allows the rack to stay tight, but loose enough for the pieces to pivot.

Then, I repeated for all ten holes, lining up the corners, predrilling and driving the screws.

TIP: Drive all the screws on the ends first, then do the two center holes last.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing screw in center hat rack board

The accordion rack should be able to contract and expand freely.

Shara Woodshop Diaries demonstrating how hat rack opens and closes

Finally, to be able to hang it, I added some D ring hangers on the back toward the top. These simple hangers are rounded, so it makes it easy to hang no matter how wide or narrow you choose to hang it.

Close up of D hangers installed on back of accordion hat rack

And with that, I tacked a couple nails into the wall studs and hung this accordion rack up.

DIY Accordion Coat Hanger for Winter Coats and Hats

It fits perfect right next to the front door and will be cute for stockings this Christmas and coats all winter long.  And in the summer, I can swap it out for hats, or umbrellas, or whatever I can find to hang here.

DIY Accordion Rack as a Christmas Stocking Hanger
DIY Accordion Coat Rack as a Summer Umbrella and Jacket Hanger

Looking for More easy DIY projects?

With the upcoming holidays, I’ve teamed up with my friend, Kati, from Houseful of Handmade and Anika, from Anika’s DIY Life to share some easy and fun gift ideas that you can make this season!

I’ve included their projects in the gallery below plus a few of my own (click on the images to see how to make each one).

Rotating Spice Rack
Wooden Spoon Rest
Cutting Board Drink Coasters
DIY Book Holder
DIY Book Stand
Easy Serving Board

Enjoyed this project and want to save it for later? Be sure to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

How to Build a DIY Accordion Coat Rack with Two Tools and One Board Pinterest image!

Until next time, happy building 🙂

DIY Scrap Wood Catch All Tray

November 4, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to make a simple DIY scrap wood catch all tray in any shape or size!

The great thing about these catch all trays is that they can be cut entirely with a jig saw. No CNC machine or router required!

Simple wooden oval shaped catch all trays made from pine and walnut wood

It’s a great way to use up some of those colorful offcuts you’ve been saving in the scrap pile and the perfect handmade gift idea to give for almost any occassion!

I made these in an oval shape to keep things quick and simple, but they’re easy to customize to any shape or size, so it’s a fun project to get creative with, as well!

If you’re ready to dive in and see how to make them, let’s get building.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

These simple catch all trays are a great project to make in batches. If you have several pieces of scrap to work with, you can make a few of these at once.

They’re quick to make, but it does require some time for the glue to dry. If you’re impatient, consider adding some CA or super glue in with your regular wood glue to allow you to move onto the next step while the regular glue fully cures.

Consider making multiple sizes and shapes to get creative–a square, a monogram, a logo, or an animal. Several years ago, I made trays similar to this in the shape of a pumpkin and a leaf!

This project calls for using a jig saw, but if you have a scroll or band saw you’d rather use, those would work well, too!

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to Make a Catch All Tray

I’ve included the step by step instructions below. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Jig Saw
  • Drill
  • Sander
  • Clamps
  • Kreg MultiMark

Materials:

  • Scrap Wood (see step 1)
  • Wood Glue
  • Finish as desired

Step 1: Select Board(s) for Tray

First, I needed to find a board (or two…or three!) that I liked to make these catch all trays from. The board should be no more than ¾″ thick (which is the thickness of standard nominal 1x lumber like you find at the big box store).

RELATED: Understanding lumber sizing

And it should be at least double the length you’d like to make your tray. For example, if you want a tray 10″ long, make sure your board is at least 20″ long.

The board WIDTH doesn’t have to be any specific size–it really just depends on how big you’d like your tray. A 1×6 or 1×8 size works well for a small tray, but you can go bigger if you want!

So I dug around in my scrap pile and found some 1×8 pine scraps.

Pine 1x8 scrap boards laying on workbench

And I also found some small off cuts of a few colorful hardwoods. Any of these can work, but I opted to make one pine and one walnut catch all tray.

multicolor hardwood boards laying on workbench

Step 2: Cut Out Middle

Once I selected my boards, I found the center of each one and marked it.

Shara Woodshop Diaries marking center of scrap board

Then, I used a quart sized paint can to help me trace an oval shape on one half of my board. I made sure my oval shape was at least ¾″ in from the center line and my board end.

Shara Woodshop Diaries tracing oval catch all tray cut out shape with paint can

I need to cut this oval shape out, so I drilled a large hole inside the shape to give me a place to get my jig saw blade started.

Drilling large hole in scrap board to cut oval

Then I carefully cut this out using my jig saw. I recommend using a scroll or a fine finish wood blade in your jig saw and keeping your orbital setting (if your saw has them) turned off for best results.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting oval catch all tray shape out with jig saw

NOTE: I’m obviously making very simple oval shaped catch all trays here, but keep in mind that you can apply this same concept to any size or shape tray that you’d like.

I actually did this same thing several years ago to make a large pumpkin shaped tray, and a large leaf shaped tray as well. So feel free to get creative here.

Step 3: Glue up Catch All Tray

After I cut my oval out, I cut my board in half down the centerline that I marked in step 2.

Then, I sanded both pieces well. Make sure to sand the inside of the oval! If your jig saw cuts were a little off, you can sand it to help shape and smooth it out.

Two pieces of pine 1x8 cut and being sanded to make tray

Then, I glued these two pieces together. Be careful not to apply TOO much wood glue because you don’t want it to squeeze out into the center.

I applied a good bead around the edge, then used my finger to spread it out a little to get good coverage.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood glue to bottom of oval cut out shape board

Then I carefully clamped the oval cut out piece onto the solid piece and clamped. Be sure to wipe away any glue squeeze out that makes it into the oval cut out!

Shara Woodshop Diaries clamping glued catch all tray boards together on workbench

I’ve been showing you this process with my pine board, but I did the same thing with my walnut board as well–I made my pine board a little “chunkier” and my walnut board a little “thinner.”

I was sure to give the glue plenty of time to dry, then, I removed the tray from the clamps.

Close up of walnut board glued together for DIY catch all tray

Step 4: Cut Final Shape & Finish

Next, I used my Kreg MultiMark tool to help me draw an offset around the oval to sketch out my final tray shape.

On my pine board, I set my Multimark to ¾″ and traced a ¾″ lip around the oval cut out. You could also use other templates or objects to trace your final shape as well.

Shara Woodshop Diaries using Kreg Multimark tool to draw an offset

Then I cut this out with a jig saw. This piece is thick, so cutting with a jig saw is doable, but it’s slow. Take your time. Make sure to use a good blade and one that is long enough to cut through the whole piece.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting catch all tray to final shape with jig saw

The cut doesn’t have to be perfect because after cutting, you can sand to smooth things out I recommend sanding the edges to smooth the shape with 80 grit, then work your way up to 220 or higher.

RELATED: How to sand wood

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries sanding catch all tray edges with orbital sander

After cutting this “chunky” lip on the pine tray, I wanted to do a thinner lip on the walnut tray, so instead of a ¾″ offset, I used ¼″ offset and repeated this process on it the exact same way.

Once both trays were cut and sanded well, I finished them with some Walrus Oil Furniture Finish. This is an oil that is easy to wipe on and let soak in.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying furniture finish to walnut catch all tray on workbench

And with that, these simple catch all trays are ready for catching all the things. These would work great on a nightstand or by the door to toss in keys, glasses, and accessories.

Oval shaped DIY wooden catch all tray made from pine with glasses, keys, and guitar pick inside

They would also work well on a desk to corral pens, paper clips, and other odds and ends.

Finished DIY wooden catch all tray made from walnut with glasses, keys and guitar pick inside

They’re such a great way to use up some scraps while also making something practical and unique to gift to anyone on your list!

Looking for More easy DIY projects?

With the upcoming holidays, I’ve teamed up with my friend, Kati, from Houseful of Handmade and Anika from Anika’s DIY Life to share some easy and fun gift ideas that you can make this season!

I’ve included their projects in the gallery below plus a few of my own (click on the images to see how to make each one).

Tabletop Jewelry Holder
Wall Mounted Jewelry Organizer
Scrap Wood Key Holder Catch All
Desk Catch All Organizer
DIY Key Holder Organizer
Tea Box with Mug Holder

Enjoyed this project and want to save it for later? Be sure to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing cutting oval shape with jig saw at top and completed wooden catch all trays at bottom

Until next time, happy building!

Custom DIY Wooden Bookends

November 3, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to make your own custom DIY bookends from scrap wood!

These simple bookends would make the perfect handmade gift for just about anyone because you can customize them with different shapes.

DIY wooden bookends with music notes on each side

As you can see above, I made these “music themed,” but you could swap the music notes for a car, a monogram, a logo, an instrument, an animal, or just about any shape you can think of.

So, you can easily personalize these for whoever you’d like and whatever their interests are.

I actually made some similar bookends several years ago in the shape of a guitar!

These are a quick build, so if you’re ready to dive in, I’m sharing how to make you own below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to know before building

This is a really great scrap wood project because the pieces needed are small.

You only need about 16-20″ of board length for the bookend parts (the L shaped pieces). I used a scrap piece of 1×4 white oak for my bookends, but any board about 1×4 or 1×6 size would work fine.

And I used some 1×12 pine scraps to cut out my shapes. A 1×12 was actually much bigger than I really needed, but that’s just what I had on hand.

You can use any type of wood you’d like for this project. You might consider doing a two tone look and making the shape one wood type and the bookends another.

Of course, you can also paint or stain them different colors as well.

Either way, I do recommend using a softer wood for the shape cut out. A hardwood can be challenging to cut (especially small details) with a jig saw.

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to make personalized bookends

I’ve included the step by step instructions below. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Jig Saw
  • Miter Saw
  • Sander and/or Sand Paper (will need to sand the shape well)
  • Clamps

Materials:

  • Scrap wood (various sizes–see notes above)
  • Wood Glue
  • Paint/Finish as desired

Step 1: Select a Shape & Create Template

The first step is deciding what kind of shape or design you want to put on your bookends.

In my case, I wanted to add music notes, so I literally just did a Google search for “music notes” and copied and pasted an image into a Word Document. Then I sized it about 3 ½″ tall and cropped it into two pieces.

Then I printed it out and cut out the shapes with scissors.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting out music note shape from a piece of paper with scissors

So, first, you just need to create a template for whatever shape you’re wanting to cut. You can freehand your design, find one online, trace a figurine, whatever.

Step 2: Cut Out Shapes

Once I had my two music note pieces cut out, I traced them onto a scrap piece of 1×12 board.

Shara Woodshop Diaries tracing music note shapes on scrap board with pencil

Then, I carefully cut these out with a jig saw.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting out music note shapes with a jig saw

Now, here’s an important note: I could have printed off the music note as one piece, cut it out as one piece, then just cut it in half.

So it doesn’t matter WHEN it becomes two pieces, just THAT it becomes two pieces.

Music note pieces cut out and held together to show overall shape

OR–It’s also worth noting that you don’t even have to split your shape. If you wanted to cut a dog shape for one side and a cat shape for another, you can totally do that. Or if you wanted to just cut a triangle shape for both sides, that’s fine, too!

Feel free to get as creative or as simple as you’d like. This is the part you can customize.

Once I had my music notes cut, I sanded them well to smooth out any uneven edges, then spray painted them flat black.

Shara Woodshop Diaries spray painting music note pieces for DIY wooden bookends

Step 3: Assemble Bookends

While the paint dried on my music notes, I cut a scrap piece of white oak 1×4 into two pieces about 3 ½″ long and two pieces about 4 ½″ long.

Make sure these are big enough to fit your shape–adjust sizing as needed.

I glued and clamped the 3 ½″ long pieces to the 4 ½″ long pieces to make two bookends in an L shape.

Clamping bookend pieces together on workbench

Step 4: Attach Custom Shapes to Bookends

After the paint on the music notes was dry and the glue on the bookends was dry, I applied a little wood glue to my music notes only where they will touch my bookends and carefully placed them inside.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood glue to music notes to attach them to bookends

You may need to use some spacer blocks or painters tape to help hold your pieces in position while the glue dries.

You can see below, the note on the left could stand on it’s own while the glue dried, but the one on the right would fall. So I leaned it over so it stayed in place.

DIY wooden bookends with music note symbols on workbench

After the glue dried, I applied a little Walrus Oil Furniture Finish to the oak bookends to finish this up.

NOTE: I did not apply an oil based finish to the oak before gluing the pieces on because the wood glue is water based. It would not stick if an oil was applied, so I applied the oil AFTER gluing the music notes on.

And now these adorable little bookends are perfect for music books, or just for decoration on the bookshelf.

Finished personalized wooden bookends with music notes next to vase

They’d make such a cute gift for the musician on your gift list!

Wooden bookends with music notes on both sides of two old books

Looking for More easy DIY projects?

With the upcoming holidays, I’ve teamed up with my friend, Kati, from Houseful of Handmade and Anika, from Anika’s DIY Life to share some easy and fun gift ideas that you can make this season!

I’ve included their projects in the gallery below plus a few of my own (click on the images to see how to make each one).

Tabletop Charging Station
Tabletop Book Rack
DIY Book Holder
Desk Organizer
DIY Book Stand
DIY Guitar Bookends--And Easy and Quick Scrap Wood Project
Scrap Wood Bookends

Enjoyed this project and want to save it for later? Be sure to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing music note cut outs at top and completed wooden bookends at bottom with text "custom DIY bookends made from scrap wood"

Until next time, happy building!

DIY Kids Fold Up Art Easel

November 2, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a simple two sided DIY kids art easel that folds up for easy storage!

This adorable easel can hold a paper roll for coloring and paint, and each canvas is a chalkboard, too!

chalkboard DIY kids art easel with wooden frame and storage tray for crayons and pencils

It’s quick and easy to set up, but also quick and easy to fold up and put away if you’re limited on space. Folded up, this easel can easily slide into a small nook or closet as it’s only about 3″ thick!

This would make such a fun gift idea for a little artist and it turned out so cute, it makes me want to build a bigger version for adults!

DIY wooden kids art easel with paper roll and collapsible tray

Maybe I’ll tackle a big version one day, but for now, I’m really excited to show you how to build this DIY kid size easel in the post below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This is SUCH a fun project that you can easily complete in a weekend. It really only takes a couple hours to assemble, but because the chalkboard paint requires a few coats, if you include all the dry time, it can take a day or two to get the canvases ready.

But, once the chalkboard paint is finished, assembly goes quick!

Overall Dimensions

The overall dimensions of this DIY art easel when open are approximately 20 ½″ deep x 22 ½″ wide x 47 1/16″ tall. Note that the paper roll support at the top is 29″ wide.

DIY art easel overall dimensions diagram

When closed, this easel measures 3″ deep x 22 ½″ wide x 48″ tall.

POCKET HOLES

A standard size pocket hole jig can work fine for this entire project. But, because 1x2s are so small, I recommend, if possible, to use the Kreg Micro pocket hole jig with them.

Close up of Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig

The Micro Jig is not NECESSARY, but it does drill smaller holes so it’s less likely to split the wood. Learn more about how and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig here.

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to Build a Kids Art Easel

I’ve included the step by step building instructions below along with printable building plans. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable DIY art easel building plans here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • ⅝″ Forstner Bit or Hole Saw
  • Circular Saw and plywood cutting guides (Rip Cut & AccuCut)
  • Pocket Hole Jig (Kreg Micro Recommended)
  • Miter Saw
  • Jig Saw
  • Brad Nailer
  • Level
  • Clamps

Materials:

  • (1) 2′ x 4′ piece ½″ plywood (this is ¼ of a full sheet)
  • (1) 2′ x 2′ piece ¼″ plywood (this is ⅛ of a full sheet)
  • (5) 1x2x8 boards
  • (1) ⅝″ diameter dowel 36″ long
  • (1) ½″ square dowel 36″ long (or small scrap strips)
  • (1) 12″ piano hinge
  • 1 ¼″ long brad nails
  • (1) 100 count box 1 ¼″ pocket hole screws
  • Chalkboard paint
  • Wood Glue

Step 1: Paint Chalkboard Canvases

First, I cut two pieces of ½″ plywood to use for the canvases on the easel. After sanding them smooth, I primed and painted one side of each with chalkboard paint.

Shara Woodshop Diaries painting plywood canvases with chalkboard paint on workbench

Read the instructions to on the can for proper chalkboard paint application. I recommend applying at least 3-4 coats for a durable chalkboard.

TIP: I highly recommend using a cabinet grade birch or maple plywood for these pieces just because they need to be really smooth to make a good chalkboard. A low quality plywood may be too rough to be practical.

Check out the printable plans for all the dimensions, cut list and cut diagrams to build your own!

Step 2: Assemble Easel Frames

While the canvases dried, I began building the easel frames from 1x2s. This easel is made with two frames and each frame has two legs and three supports.

I made one of the frames with legs a little longer than the other so that they can extend out the top with a notch to hold a roll of paper.

So I cut four 1x2s legs for my frames and on my two longer legs, I drilled a ⅝″ diameter hole toward the top.

Drilling holes for paper roll holder in easel frame legs

Then I used a jig saw to cut from the hole to the board edges like you see below. These slots will fit a ⅝″ diameter dowel rod in order to hold a roll of paper on the easel to paint or draw on.

Close up of notches cut in easel frame legs for paper roll holder

Then, I cut my 1×2 supports that will run between the legs and drilled pocket holes in each end.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes

Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling pocket holes in 1x2 to assemble art easel frame

I assembled my two frames–one tall and one short–using pocket hole screws. One support runs flat along the top, and the other two supports run vertically, flush to the front edge of the legs like you see below.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling short frame of kids art easel with pocket hole screws

On the tall frame, the top support will be installed a few inches down from the top edge of the legs, but on the short frame, it’s installed flush to the top.

All the dimensions and full cut list can be found in the printable plans.

Step 3: Install Canvases & Attach Frames

Once the two frames were together, I stained them with Minwax Water Based Semi-Transparent in Driftwood. Then, I installed the chalkboard canvases into each one.

I wanted to leave a small gap (about ¼″) between the 1x2s on the frame and the chalkboard panel. That way, you can slide the paper from the paper roll between them to hold it in place when it’s finished.

So I used a scrap piece of ¼″ plywood under my chalkboards while I secured them into my frames. I just countersunk and drove 1 ¼″ wood screws through each leg to secure my plywood pieces.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing chalkboard canvas into art easel frame on workbench

I did this for both frames, making sure to face the chalkboard painted sides toward the front of each frame.

Two frames of art easel with chalkboards installed ready to attach

Then, I placed my frames back to back and attached them together at the top with a piano hinge. This will allow them to fold out and fold back up easily.

Attaching two sides of easel with piano hinge

All the dimensions and full cut list can be found in the printable plans.

Step 4: Assemble & Install Easel Tray

Now the easel part is together, but I still need to add the tray, which is essentially just a really shallow box.

I cut 1x2s for the sides and a piece of ¼″ plywood for the bottom and simply glued and brad nailed this box together.

TIP: This tray should be just slightly (about ⅛″) smaller than the opening between the legs on the frames.

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing easel tray together on workbench

I placed the easel frames folded together on the workbench like you see below and placed this tray toward the bottom, between the legs. (This is why I made it just smaller than the opening–it should fit between the legs.)

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing tray through easel frame with screw

I countersunk a hole and drove a screw through the bottom frame legs on each side to secure the tray. It needs to be snug, but not cranked down super tight. This tray should be able to pivot so that it can smoothly open and close.

Step 5: Install Frame Supports

I cut one more piece of 1×2 to fit between the legs on the frame and drilled pocket holes into each end. This piece will support the tray when the easel is opened up.

I set the easel, opened up, on my workbench and raised the tray until it was level (I used a small level for this). And I placed this 1×2 under the tray on the side opposite the screw.

Shara Woodshop Diaries using a level to position tray support piece into easel frame

Making sure the tray stayed level, I secured this 1×2 tray support with pocket hole screws from the inside.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing tray support into easel with pocket hole screws

Now the tray is supported, but I wanted to add something to help stabilize the easel when it was open. I was concerned it might slide too far open and fall over.

So I cut some small scrap pieces about ½″ square and carefully glued these as stoppers onto the bottom of the tray on each side of the 1×2 tray support.

Shara Woodshop Diaries clamping stopper blocks to easel tray

I made sure not to glue these TO the tray support. They should be glued to the tray bottom on each side of the support. That way, they help to kind of “lock” the tray in place to keep the frame open.

How to Set Up and Fold Down Art Easel

All that’s left at this point is to add the paper roll, so I cut a piece of ⅝″ diameter dowel and slid it through a roll of paper. Then, I placed this into the notches on the top of the long frame legs.

Close up of DIY art easel paper roll dowel placed in notches on frame

To set up, simply place the easel on a flat surface and open the frame.

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding folded up DIY art easel with tray

Raise the tray up over the 1×2 tray support and slide it through the frame. Then, lower the tray onto the tray support so that it’s securely between the stoppers on the bottom of the tray.

Shara Woodshop Diaries opening fold up easel to position tray

If you want to use paper to draw, color, or paint, slide the paper through the gaps between the frame and the chalkboard on either side of the easel. OR, simply use the chalkboard as the canvas.

Shara Woodshop Diaries standing next to open art easel with tray in locked position

To fold back up, simply lift the tray off the tray support and push it back through the frame. Lower the tray and fold the two frames back together.

Looking for More easy DIY projects?

With the upcoming holidays, I’ve teamed up with my friend, Kati, from Houseful of Handmade and Anika from Anika’s DIY Life to share some easy and fun gift ideas that you can make this season!

I’ve included their projects in the gallery below plus a few of my own (click on the images to see how to make each one).

DIY Footrest
Playing Card Tray
DIY Rotating Bookshelf
Kid’s Storage Table
DIY Tic Tac Toe Game

Enjoyed this project and want to save it for later? Be sure to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing Shara holding folded up art easel at top and opened art easel at bottom with text "how to build a kids art easel"

Until next time, happy building!

10+ Easy Christmas DIYs

October 25, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing some of my favorite easy to build Christmas themed DIY projects!

I know things are always a little crazy this time of the year, so I hope this helps you get a jump on the decorating (or gifts!) with a few quick projects you can make over the weekend.

Pinterest collage of 10+ easy Christmas DIYs

Each year, I like to make a seasonal project or two. Sometimes it’s something decorative, sometimes it’s something practical. But, over the years, when I look back, they’ve always been some of my favorites.

So, I’ve listed my top 10+ favorite DIY Christmas holiday projects that I hope can inspire you to create one of your own!

Click on any of the project images or highlighted links to take you to the tutorial for how to build each one.

*This post contains affiliate links. See policies.

Christmas Tree Shaped Tiered Candy Stand

This might be my favorite Christmas project of all time. Made from scrap wood and wood glue (seriously…it’s that easy), this adorable two tone tree shaped tiered tray is the perfect display for holiday cookies and candy.

3 tier Christmas tree shaped candy stand--one of 10+ easy Christmas DIYs

I even shared my favorite 3-ingredient candy recipe in the post *wink wink* Check out how to build the tray and make the candy here.

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Scrap Wood Christmas Tree Art

This adorable Christmas tree sign is quick to make and easily customizable to any size you need.

It was inspired by one of my all time favorite DIY projects ever–this simple pumpkin sign and these wooden sunflowers.

This holiday season, I decided to take that same concept and make a fun little Christmas tree.

If you’re ready to make one of your own, grab your jig saw and let’s get building!

How to make it: Scrap Wood Christmas Tree Art

DIY Decorative Wooden Christmas Sled

Tis the season for all the fun Christmas DIYs. Even better if they’re made from scrap wood like this simple wooden sled!

This adorable decorative sled is a super easy project and you can likely find everything you need to build it from your scrap pile with just a few basic tools.

Then once it’s built, feel free to add a custom logo, festive design, or monogram to make it your own. If you’re ready to see how you can build your own, let’s dive in to the how-to!

Stackable Wooden Christmas Tree

What’s so cool about this design is that, while it’s obviously, super cute to decorate for the holidays, it’s also easy to take apart and store away since the pieces all fit inside each other.

This is such a fun weekend woodworking project to get you in the holiday spirit, but it’s also a great option for small spaces (like apartments or bedrooms) where you may not have space for a large tree.

Whether you add this next to your existing tree, or use it as your main Christmas tree, it’s sure to bring a little Christmas joy to your space this season.

Learn how to build this nesting wooden Christmas tree here.

Snowflake Shelf

This is an oldie, but goodie. This DIY snowflake shelf was a project from years ago that I built simply from 1×4 boards.

DIY wooden snowflake shelf

It’s large, but so fun to make and decorate. If you’ve got a wall to fill, this is an excellent, easy Christmas DIY that you can easily make in a weekend, and leave up until spring!

Check out the DIY snowflake shelf plans here.

Light Up Wooden Snow Art

A couple years ago I saw a kind of wall art Christmas light up village thing at a store and thought it would be cool to make something similar. 

It had a ton of little intricate cut out details, but I’m too impatient for that, so I went with a more simple design with just a couple of trees. 

This is one of those simple projects that are so much fun to customize. Learn how to make a light up wooden art piece here.

Scandinavian Scrap Wood Christmas Village

This scrap wood Christmas village is SO fun to make and, again, only requires some scrap wood and wood glue to make. I made it using ¼″ plywood so it’s easy to cut and super lightweight!

How to make your own DIY wooden Christmas village perfect for Scandinavian Christmas decor. Easy and free project tutorial

I’ll show you how to get started making one of them, then you can get creative designing the rest in whatever shape you want! Grab the tutorial and details on this Wooden Christmas Village here.

Scrap Wood Ornament Signs

Another fun scrap wood project (have you noticed a theme, here??), these easy scrap wood Christmas ornament signs let you get creative with your colors, size, and shape.

Scrap wood Christmas ornament sign DIYs

Mix and match to make these fit with your own Christmas style–whether you’re more modern, traditional, rustic. This tutorial shows you how to make them, but your creativity lets you make them YOUR OWN.

Scrap Wood Lantern Post

This fun project uses some scrap wood and an old spindle to make an ADORABLE Christmas lantern post.

DIY Christmas Lantern Post from Wood Scraps and an Old Spindle--great way to repurpose an old spindle

You can set this next to your front door, by the tree, or anywhere it’ll be covered (it’s probably not best out in the elements). Customize your own little sign to hang on it and stick a little battery candle inside.

Check out how to build your own Christmas lantern post in this tutorial.

Christmas Tree Stand Storage Trunk

This is one of my all time favorite furniture builds. Not only is it eye catching, but it’s SUPER simple in design, and it doubles as both a Christmas Tree Stand, AND a hope chest.

DIY wooden hope chest used as a Christmas tree stand trunk

So, if you’re limited on space, you can fill it full of your seasonal decorations, and when it’s time for the tree, pull them out, set them up, and just stick the tree inside. No need to find floor space for BOTH the tree and the chest *wink wink*

Grab the free building plans for this hope chest Christmas tree stand here.

Large DIY Wooden Lantern

I shared a small, simple lantern above, but this one is quite a bit bigger and a little more detailed.

How to build a GORGEOUS wood lantern!

If you’re looking for something a little more challenging and decorative, this is a really fun DIY project that’s perfect for decorating for the seasons. Fill it with lights, poinsettias, Christmas balls, or ribbon!

Check out the step by step tutorial to build this DIY wooden lantern here.

Christmas Tree Truck

This project is a two in one–it’s a simple stocking hanger box, BUT I made it cooler by making the box a trailer and building a little truck to “pull” it.

Little red wooden truck Christmas stocking hanger box

This project was so fun, but you have to get creative 😉 Check out this adorable DIY Christmas Truck and stocking trailer tutorial here.

Christmas Pillows

While I mostly deal with woodworking projects, I do really love to sew, especially in the winter months.

If you’re up for an EASY sewing project, I’ve got two fun pillow cover ideas that are perfect for Christmas and winter.

This snowflake pillow cover is easy to make, but totally customizable with anything you want…not just a snowflake. Do a pumpkin or leaf for fall, a flower for spring, a dog, a cat…ANYTHING you want. Personally, though, I’m a fan of the snowflake 😉

DIY snowflake pillow cover--Easy Christmas DIY project
Snowflake Pillow Cover

And this Grinch pillow cover is an easy and fun DIY to try as well! If you’re into sequins, this is the one for you 🙂

Check out this awesome Grinch Pillow--a Pottery Barn Knock Off! One of 10+ easy Christmas DIYs

Now, I’m in the mood to make a few more easy Christmas DIYs to add to the list!

I hope you found your next project (or two!) from this easy Christmas DIYs list and if you enjoyed it and want to save this for later, be sure to pin it!

Pinterest collage of 10+ easy Christmas DIYs

In the mean time, happy building, friends, and Merry Christmas! May this season bring you joy, hope, and sawdust 🙂

How to Build a Tall Dresser

October 24, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a tall dresser chest to maximize storage in a small bedroom.

This six drawer chest design is part of a matching bedroom furniture set that I’ve been sharing over the last year or so.

Tall DIY 6 drawer red oak chest of drawers dresser against white wall

Out of habit, I guess, I usually build my dressers short and wide. So, after sharing the two different wide dresser designs in this matching set, I had several requests to build a tall chest of drawers as well.

One of the biggest advantages of a tall dresser is that it maximizes storage vertically with a minimal footprint horizontally.

So it’s perfect for smaller bedrooms where you don’t have a lot of floor space to work with.

Luckily a tall dresser is often easier to build than a wider one, so if you’re ready to tackle building your own, I’ll show you how below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

I know that dressers can be an intimidating project for some–especially one with so many drawers! But, I like to think of dressers as a box (the dresser frame) with a bunch of smaller boxes inside (the dresser drawers).

So if you can build a box, you can build a dresser. First, let’s cover some helpful tips before getting started.

What Type of Wood To Build a Chest of Drawers With

This tall dresser build is made entirely from plywood except for the front and back frames and the side trim, which are solid lumber. I used red oak for this particular dresser, but any wood type you prefer would work fine.

close up of a piece of red oak scrap

Construction lumber (like pine, spruce, fir) and birch plywood is a more budget friendly option that would work great as well.

For plywood thickness, I prefer using ¾″ plywood for everything except drawer bottoms (I use ¼″ plywood for those).

If you want to, you can save a little money and weight by using ½″ plywood for the drawer boxes, but for supports, dividers and side panels on the main dresser body, I definitely recommend the added strength of ¾″ thick plywood.

If you’re new to DIY, check out this post to learn more about choosing plywood for your projects and this post about how and where to buy lumber.

Material Sizing Notes

This plan calls for 2x2s for the front and back frames. (Did you know 2x2s aren’t 2″ x 2″? Learn more about understanding lumber sizing here.)

Red oak 2x2s cut on table saw

I recommend ripping the 2×2 pieces down from 2x4s and/or 2x6s if you have a table saw. Making your own 2x2s usually saves some money, but also gives you better quality 2x2s (less warped and twisted) than the precut ones from the store.

RELATED: How to cut your own 2x2s

And you can reuse the off cuts for lattice trim on the sides, too! See tutorial video for more information.

Matching Bedroom Furniture Set

If you’re looking to build the whole set, you can find the plans for the matching pieces here:

  • Matching Storage Bed
  • Matching Modern Nightstand
  • Matching 6 Drawer Dresser
  • Matching 9 Drawer Dresser
Collage image of matching bedroom set pieces

Overall Dimensions

Overall dimensions of this dresser as shown in the plans below are approximately 18 ½″ deep x 30″ wide x 52 ½″ tall.

Overall dimensional diagram of tall dresser with 6 drawers

Helpful Resources for the Build

If you’re new to building drawers, don’t worry! I’ll walk you through the entire drawer building process from start to finish in this step by step drawer building series (with videos!). I’ve broken it down into four parts:

  • How to measure for and size drawer boxes
  • How to assemble a drawer box
  • How to install drawer slides
  • How to install drawer fronts

Prefer to print the whole thing? Grab the Ultimate Drawer Building Guide which includes all four parts in a printable e-book you can take to the shop with you.

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding drawer box

Additional helpful resources for this build:

  • How to cut plywood sheets
  • How to apply edge banding
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to use a dowel jig 

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to Build a Basic Tall Dresser

I’ve included the step by step building instructions below along with printable building plans. But, if you prefer to watch, I’ve also included a build video as well. 

Check out the video for tips, visuals, and some extra clips from behind the scenes!

YouTube Thumbnail image of Shara Woodshop Diaries with tall dresser

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable modern chest of drawers building plans here:

Tools & Materials:

Tools:

  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw and plywood cutting guides (Rip Cut & AccuCut)
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Clamps
  • Miter Saw
  • Jig Saw
  • Dowel Jig (optional)
  • Table Saw (optional)

Materials:

  • (2) 4’x8′ sheets ¾″ plywood
  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¼″ plywood
  • (2) 2x2x8 boards
  • (1) 1x2x8 board (optional for trimming side panels)
  • (3) ¼″x 1 ½″ x 8′ lattice trim (optional for trimming side panels & drawer fronts)
  • 1 ¼” pocket hole screws (coarse thread for softwood and plywood, fine thread for hardwood)
  • ⅜″ x 1 ½″ Dowel pins OR 2 ½″ pocket hole screws
  • (5) 2″ wood screws
  • Wood glue
  • (6) pair 16″ drawer slides
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)
  • Drawer pulls/knobs

Step 1: Assemble Front & Back Frames

To start this build, first, I needed to assemble two frames for the dresser. These are the parts of the project that are made from solid wood and will be the front and back.

I used 2x2s to build these two frames and I ripped them down from a 2×4 board (see notes above), and trimmed them to length. But, again, you can certainly use precut 2x2s if you’d like.

Shara Woodshop Diaries laying out and marking dowel holes on dresser frame

Note: If you rip your own 2x2s, note that 2x4s are 3 ½″ wide and 2x2s are 1 ½″ square. So after ripping two 2x2s from a 2×4, you’ll have a ~ ¼″ thick piece left. You can save this pieces to use as lattice trim later!

All the dimensions, cut diagrams, and cut lists can be found in the printable building plans here.

Then, I assembled these pieces into two identical frames using dowel pins and glue. But, you could also assemble using 1 ½″ pocket holes and 2 ½″ pocket hole screws if you’d rather.

Close up of drilling dowel holes with Kreg dowel jig

If you’re new to using dowels, this guide walks you through how to use a dowel jig. The jig I used for this project is the new Kreg Doweling Jig, so the jig shown in the guide looks a bit different than the photo above, but it works the same.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling chest of drawers frame for front and back of dresser

I clamped the frames while the glue dried, then sanded away any glue squeeze out before moving on.

Step 2: Assemble Dresser Sides

From here, the rest of the tall dresser build is assembled with plywood. So I cut two ¾″ plywood side panels to attach between the frames from step 1 using pocket holes and screws.

RELATED: How to use a pocket hole jig

Be sure if driving into hardwood, like oak, use fine thread pocket hole screws! Check out this guide to choosing the right screws for your project.

Shara Woodshop Diaries attaching the side panel of tall dresser

I installed these panels flush to the inside of the dresser legs. This makes installing the drawer slides easier later.

Shara Woodshop Diaries attaching side panels of chest of drawers on workbench with pocket holes

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this project here.

Step 3: Install Drawer Dividers

I wanted to divide the top section of this tall dresser into two smaller drawers. So, that meant I needed to add a divider to separate them and to give me somewhere to mount the slides.

I cut a piece of ¾″ plywood to use as my divider and I used a jig saw to cut a 1 ½″ square notch out of the top back corner so it would fit around the back 2×2 frame.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries using jig saw to notch back corner of drawer divider

Then I cut some ¾″ plywood strips to divide out all of my drawer sections. There will be 5 sections total: 4 large drawers at the bottom and two small drawers at the top.

I sectioned off the top drawers first and clamped my notched divider to the side of my dresser to help me position two divider strips.

I installed one strip at the back and one strip ½″ inset from the front edge using pocket holes and screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing top drawer divider strips into tall dresser frame

NOTE: I edge banded the front edge of my drawer dividers to hide the plywood edges. This makes it look much cleaner. Learn how to apply edge banding here.

After my top two plywood strips were installed into the frame, I centered the notched plywood piece and used wood screws to secure it at the bottom.

Close up of drawer divider clamped into dresser frame

You’ll see I drilled a pocket hole at the top corner to secure it to the top frame (ignore the bottom pocket hole–that was a mistake!). And I used a 2″ wood screw to secure it to the top back frame.

From there, I installed three more drawer divider strips evenly spaced in the bottom section of the dresser. These will divide the large drawers. These dividers only need to be installed toward the front of the dresser, not at the back.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer dividers into chest frame using pocket hole screws

Just to give this basic dresser some extra interest and dimension, I installed all my divider strips ½″ inset from the front edge of the dresser.

Step 4: Build & Install Dresser Drawers

I installed six pair of 16″ ball bearing drawer slides into the tall dresser to mount the drawers to.

These drawers will be inset and the drawer front will be ¾″ plywood with a piece of ¼″ lattice trim on the front (more on that in just a minute), so it will be 1″ thick total. 

Close up of Kreg MultiMark tool to find drawer front thickness

PS this Kreg MultiMark tool is super handy to have in the shop for quick measurements and offsets.

So I installed the slides 1″ inset from the drawer dividers so that the drawer fronts will be flush to them once installed.

RELATED: How to install drawer slides

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer slides into tall dresser frame

Then I built six drawer boxes–two small ones for the top section and four larger ones for the bottom section.

RELATED: How to determine drawer sizing for any project

I assembled the drawer boxes from ¾″ plywood (for the sides) and ¼″ plywood (for the bottom) using pocket holes and screws.

Check out how to assemble drawer boxes here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling drawer box on workbench

Then, I installed the drawer boxes into the chest. There are several ways to install drawer boxes, but I like to place some ¼″ scrap plywood pieces on the divider below the drawer, pull the slides flush to the front, and simply screw them in.

Learn how to install drawers and drawer slides here.

All drawers installed into tall dresser frame in Woodshop Diaries workshop

Printable building plans with cut list, cut diagrams and dimensions for this DIY tall dresser can be found here.

Step 5: Build & Install Drawer Fronts

Once the boxes were in, I cut drawer fronts from ¾″ plywood to fit the openings. They should be ¼″ shorter and ¼″ narrower than the opening.

For the top drawer front, I cut it as one solid piece to fit the opening, then cut it in the center (for the two separate drawers) so that the grain matched across the front.

Then I applied iron on edge banding to the sides and top of each one. To give them some extra detail, I cut some ¼″ thick x 1 ½″ wide strips to glue onto the front flush to the left and right edges.

Close up of gluing trim pieces onto dresser drawer fronts

Then I placed these into the openings, made sure the gaps on all sides were even (⅛″), and screwed them in from the inside of the drawer box.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer fronts onto tall dresser

Step 6: Add Top & Trim

Adding trim onto the sides is optional, but helps dress this up a little. I cut to fit and glued some 1×2 pieces to go on the top and bottom of each side panel.

Then, I cut some ¼″ x 1 ½″ lattice trim to line the sides vertically between them. This lattice trim kind of ties in the lattice on the drawer front, but isn’t necessary if you don’t want to add it.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing and clamping trim pieces onto sides of dresser

Finally, I trimmed a piece of ¾″ plywood 1″ wider and ½″ deeper than the dresser frame and edge banded the front and sides. This will be the top.

I placed it on the frame with ½″ overhang on the sides and front and screwed it in from the bottom side. (You’ll have to remove the drawer boxes to have room for the drill/driver.)

Shara Woodshop Diaries screwing top panel of dresser onto frame

To finish, I applied a wood stain (Minwax Weathered Oak) to the drawer fronts and the dresser body, then sealed it with a few coats of Minwax Polycrylic.

Once that was dry, I slid the drawers back in place and added some simple black knobs to finish it up.

Completed DIY 6 drawer tall dresser with bottom three drawers open
Front view of red oak tall dresser with two small drawers at top and four large drawers at bottom

If you want to build your own, don’t forget to grab the printable plans for this 6 drawer tall dresser here. Or if you want to build them the matching set, grab the bedroom build plan bundle with all the pieces.

Looking for More Dresser Builds?

Dressers are my favorite projects to build! So I have several fun styles and sizes to choose from if you’re looking for more DIY dresser ideas.

Here are a few of my personal favorite dresser builds you may enjoy browsing:

DIY 9 Drawer Dresser
6 Drawer Dresser
Sliding Door Storage Cabinet
DIY Mid-Century Modern Dresser
DIY Modern Dresser
DIY 5 Drawer Dresser

If you enjoyed the post and want to save it for later, don’t forget to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing Shara Woodshop Diaries with tall dresser at bottom and overall dimensional diagram of dresser at top with text "how to build a tall dresser"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

DIY Console Shelf

October 17, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a simple console table shelf that would also work perfect for a sofa table.

I actually designed this based on a similar one that I had seen online for $499. But I built it for about $50 in lumber. Not sure if you’re into math, but that’s a 90% savings!

Medium wood ton console table with open shelving

This small shelf would work perfect behind a sofa, in a living room, or a home office. You could even use it in an entryway for boots and shoes if you wanted.

It’s a great beginner woodworking project that only takes a couple hours to build, and I’m sharing all the details for how to make your own in the post below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

The size of this shelf is easy to customize. If you want a longer shelf, you can easily add a third section, if you want a shorter shelf, you can remove a section.

Because this can also double as a sofa table, I kept the overall height on the shorter side. If you wanted this taller, feel free to simply cut the legs a bit longer as desired.

The overall dimensions of this shelf are approximately 11 ¼″ deep x 25 ¾″ tall x 60″ wide.

Dimensional diagram of open shelf console table

MATERIAL CHOICES

You can use just about any wood type you’d like for this project, but to keep it budget friendly, I recommend using pine/spruce/whitewood lumber from the local big box or building supply store. This only cost about $50 in lumber to build.

Close up of spruce 1x12 boards

In the video below, I discuss how I purchased longer 1×12 boards and ripped the off cuts into 1x2s to use for this instead of buying precut 1x2s.

I also ripped my 2x2x from a 2×4. If you have a table saw, you can certainly do that vs buying precut 1x2s and 2x2s and it might save a few dollars.

RELATED: How to cut your own 2x2s

Either way, whether you rip your own lumber to size or buy precut boards, keep in mind the difference between nominal and dimensional lumber.

POCKET HOLES

A standard size pocket hole jig can work fine for this entire project. But, because 1x2s are so small, I recommend, if possible, to use the Kreg Micro pocket hole jig with them.

Close up of Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig

The Micro Jig is not NECESSARY, but it does drill smaller holes so it’s less likely to split the wood. Learn more about how and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig here.

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to Build a Console Table Bookshelf

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

YouTube Thumbnail showing Shara Woodshop Diaries with console table with text "build it for $50 or Buy it for $500"

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable console shelf building plans here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Drill/Driver
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Jig Saw
  • Clamps

Materials:

  • (3) 1x12x6′ boards
  • (4) 1x2x8′ boards
  • (2) 2x2x8′ boards
  • 100 count box 1 ¼” Pocket Hole Screws
  • (6) 2 ½″ Pocket Hole Screws
  • (25) 2″ wood screws
  • Wood Glue

Step 1: Assemble Side Frames of Shelf

This console shelf consists of three small “frames.” Two frames go on each end and one in the middle.

Each of these frames are built with two 2×2 legs and three supports. The two side frames use 1x2s as supports. We will discuss the middle frame in the next step.

So, to get started, I trimmed down four 2×2 legs and six short 1×2 boards for the supports. I drilled ¾″ pocket holes into the ends of each 1×2 like shown below.

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding up 1x2 board with pocket holes drilled in each end

All the dimensions and full cut list can be found in the printable plans.

I was using a water based finish (Minwax Semi-Transparent Water Based Stain in Aged Oak), and I find these easier to apply before everything is assembled, so I went ahead and stained my pieces before attaching.

RELATED: How to stain wood furniture

Shara Woodshop Diaries staining 1x2 boards on workbench

Then, I secured my 1x2s between my 2×2 legs using pocket hole screws–one at the top, one toward the bottom and one in the middle.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling side frames of console table with pocket hole screws

I repeated to make two identical frames–these will go on the ends of my shelf.

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding up side frames of console table with open shelves showing pocket hole assembly

Step 2: Assemble Middle Frame

The middle frame is similar to the sides, but instead of 1x2s, I used 2x2s for the supports. So I cut two 2×2 legs and three short 2×2 supports.

I drilled 1 ½″ pocket holes into the ends of the short 2x2s and installed between the legs using pocket hole screws.

This may seem confusing, but I installed one 2×2 at the top, then I installed the middle and bottom 2x2s so that the top edges were ¾″ higher than the 1x2s on the side frame. It’ll make more sense shortly.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling frame of console table shelf with pocket holes and screws

TIP: You can see in the photo above that I ended up having to use a 90 degree attachment to install my supports because my driver wouldn’t fit.

In hindsight, I should have turned these 2x2s sideways so the pocket holes faced out vs down. Once finished, the pocket holes on the sides won’t be visible and it would have made this easier to assemble.

Step 3: Assemble Console Bookshelf Base

Now that all three frames were assembled, I could attach them together to make the shelf base.

I cut 12 pieces of 1×2 to run between each frame. You can adjust the lengths as desired to make your shelf sections larger or smaller.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable console shelf plans with cut list and dimensions here.

After drilling pocket holes and staining these pieces, I secured them between the frames with pocket hole screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries building DIY console table frame on workbench

I found it easiest to assemble one section like shown above. Then, I transferred it to the floor to attach the second section. These 1x2s should be aligned with the 1x2s on the side frames.

Close up of Shara Woodshop Diaries driving pocket hole screws to assemble console base frame

I was careful to make sure the middle frame did, in fact, get installed in the middle.

Remember the middle and bottom 2x2s on the middle frame should sit higher than the 1x2s.

Completed console shelf frame in workshop

Step 4: Install Shelves to Console Frame

I cut all my shelves from 1×12 boards. First, I cut a piece of 1×12 to fit over the top of my base–the top is one solid piece.

For the middle and bottom shelves, I cut these in sections to make it much easier. So I cut four pieces of 1×12 to fit into my bottom sections.

Then, I used a jig saw to notch a 1 ½″ x 1 ½″ square off two corners so they’ll fit around the legs.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting notches in board corners with jig saw

These pieces should fit into each section of the base frame and should be flush to the top of the 2x2s in the middle frame. This is why those needed to be installed a little higher in step 2.

Shara Woodshop Diaries test fitting shelves on console base frame

After I made sure everything fit well, I removed them and stained them before securing.

I used 2″ wood screws through the 1×2 supports underneath each shelf to secure them to the base.

TIP: Make sure to predrill pilot holes before driving screws to prevent wood splits!

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing shelves to console table frame using screws through bottom supports

And with that, this console shelf and/or sofa table is ready to go! This simple shelf would be perfect for a home office where you need a place for extra books or behind the sofa for an extra surface to display your favorite décor.

Completed wooden sofa console table with open shelving

Prefer to print? Grab the printable console shelf plans with cut list and dimensions here.

Looking for more console table and bookshelf ideas?

Enjoyed this project, but interested in seeing more ideas? Here are a few favorites you might like to browse!

Click on the image(s) below to see how to build each one:

Console Table with Drawers
Arched Door Console Cabinet
Mid Century Lowboy Console
Modern Plywood Shelf
Easy DIY Shelf with Baskets
How to build a DIY X Base Console Table--free building plans!! Minwax Early American stain makes this inexpensive console table look like a million bucks! Perfect for living room, bedroom, or dining room for displays and storage!
X Base Console Shelf

If you enjoyed this project and want to save it for later, don’t forget to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing finished console table with open shelving at bottom against white wall with dimensional diagram of shelf at top with text "how to build a console shelf"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

How to Build a Wooden Lamp Post

October 4, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to make an easy DIY lamp post for a solar lantern.

I’ve always joked that we should name our long driveway “Lucy Lane,” after our (very spoiled) dog, Lucy. But giving a driveway an official street name is a hassle.

Shara Woodshop Diaries with dog Lucy sitting next to wooden lamp post with "Lucy Lane" sign

So, instead, I built this lamp post with a place to hang an unofficial road name sign. And let’s be honest, this is way cuter than any official street sign, anyway.

For those wondering, this is placed halfway down our driveway next to a scenic creek, so it’s not confusing (or visible) to anyone driving down the road.

This is a fun project to add to the end of a driveway, in a garden or around a sidewalk. And the attached hanger is a great place to display an address sign or a seasonal flag!

I’ll show you how to build it in the post and video below!

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

What’s so great about this post is that the lamp on top is solar, so there’s no need to run electricity or gas and it automatically comes on as it get’s dark outside.

It will obviously vary depending on the amount of sunlight your lamp gets, but our light, so far, has lasted all night long on the previous days’ charge.

If you don’t want a light on the post, you can swap the solar light for a basic cap, instead.

Material Choices

For longevity, I recommend using a treated post that is rated for ground contact. For the trim and sign hanger that is added to the post, I recommend using treated pine, cedar or redwood for best results.

I made the post shown using some treated wood scraps leftover from previous projects.

Shara Woodshop Diaries laying out scrap treated wood on workbench

If you don’t have treated wood in your scrap pile, untreated pine can work as well–it just may only last a year or two depending on the weather conditions.

Because I was using scraps, I just kind of used whatever I had. So feel free to mix and match. These pieces and parts don’t have to be specific sizes.

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to Build a Decorative Lamp Post

This is a really quick DIY project that you can easily complete in just a couple hours. The only reason it even takes hours is because a few steps require glue to dry and you need to let the stain dry before setting the post.

If you prefer to watch, I’ve put together a short video of the project here:

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Drill/Driver
  • Jig Saw
  • Post Hole Digger

Materials:

  • 4x4x8′ treated post
  • Treated Wood Scraps (you can mix and match, but I used 1×4, 2×4, and 1×6 pieces)
  • Exterior Rated Wood Glue
  • Exterior Screws
  • Solar Lamp
  • Sign (optional)
  • Quikrete (to set post with)

Step 1: Trim Main Post

First, I trimmed my 4×4 post to about 80″ long. This post will go into the ground about 24″, so that leaves my lamp post about 56″ tall.

Then, I added some “trim” to dress this boring post up a bit.

I mentioned that I was just using up my scraps and I had some pieces that were about 1″ square. (But 2x2s or 1x2s or any small pieces would work fine here.)

So I cut four pieces of this 1″ square board to wrap around the post with ends mitered 45 degrees. I glued and clamped them on each side about 1 ½″ down from the top end of my 4×4 post.

Close up of clamps holding trim around top of lamp post while glue dries

Then, I cut to fit 1×4 pieces around the post with ends beveled 45 degrees. I glued and nailed these pieces around the 4×4 post so that the bottom edge was 24″ up from the bottom edge of my post.

Close up of brad nailing trim around bottom of 4x4 lamp post

Once installed, these 1×4 pieces will be at ground level (so it’s best to use treated wood rated for ground contact here for longest life).

In hindsight, I wish I’d screwed these 1x4s on instead of nailed, so I recommend using some 1 ¼″ exterior screws to attach these around the post.

RELATED: How to choose the right wood screw

Diagram showing 4x4 post with trim placement at top and bottom

Once the glue was dry, I applied an outdoor stain (Cabot Solid Outdoor Stain in Black), and set this to the side while I worked on the next steps.

Step 2: Cut and Assemble Sign Hanger

Next, I assembled the piece that the sign will hang from. If you don’t want a sign or flag, feel free to skip this step, but it adds a ton of character to the otherwise basic post.

For this, I cut a piece of scrap 1×4 to 16″ long for the back (shown in yellow). I used a jig saw to round the corners in just to give it some extra detail.

Dimensional diagram of sign holder addition on lamp post

Then, I cut a piece of scrap 2×4 to about 14″ long for the bottom. I beveled one of the corners (shown in pink above), just to give it some extra detail.

I had a piece of scrap 1×6 about 16″ long, so I mitered both ends 45 degrees NOT parallel to each other. This piece will run between the back and bottom like shown above in blue.

I used a jig saw to trim some curves on this piece to give it a lot of extra shape. I just drew my shape out freehand with a pencil and cut until it looked right. There’s no right or wrong here.

Close up of cutting sign support for wooden lamp post with jig saw

Once all three pieces were cut out, I secured them like shown using 2 ½″ wood screws through the bottom and back pieces.

sign hanger for DIY lamp post assembled on workbench from treated scrap boards

Then I stained it to match the post, but I didn’t attach it just yet.

Step 3: Set Post in Ground

Now it was time to set the post! I used a battery powered earth auger to dig a hole about 24″ deep. Of course, an old fashioned post hole digger can get the job done, too!

NOTE: In our area, 24″ is recommended for post depth. Your area may differ, so check what your recommended post depth is, call 811, and always check for utilities before digging.

I set the post in the hole, filled it with Quikrete, made sure it was level, then backfilled around with dirt.

Shara Woodshop Diaries backfilling around post hole with dirt

I’ve always set my posts with dry, general purpose Quikrete. It rained immediately after setting so I didn’t add any water. But if your ground is super dry and no rain expected, you may want to add a little water around the post to help the concrete set up.

Step 4: Attach Lamp and Sign

After the post was in, I attached a solar lamp onto the top of it (the lamp comes with the hardware and screws needed to install directly to the post).

Close up of attaching solar lantern to top of wooden lamp post

Then, I used some 2″ wood screws to secure the sign holder to the post.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing sign hanger onto DIY lamp post

Then all that was left was adding our “Lucy Lane” sign. I bought a customizable address sign and it came with two eye hooks that I secured into the bottom of my 2×4 to hang from.

And now I smile every time I walk down the driveway and see this adorable little post named after my best girl, Lucy.

Black and white dog in grass sitting in front of decorative lamp post in yard

Everyone who has come down the driveway has commented on how cute it is and it’ll be fun to add a wreath to this Christmas!

Decorative DIY wooden lamp post stained black at dusk with solar lantern on
black wooden lamp post with address sign and solar lantern

Looking for more DIY outdoor projects?

Enjoyed this project, but looking for more ideas? Outdoor projects are some of my favorites to build, so I’ve got several more you will enjoy browsing!

Simply click on the image(s) below to see how to make each one!

Wooden Wheelbarrow
DIY Arched Lanterns
DIY Outdoor Chair
DIY Outdoor Coffee Table
DIY Garden Arbor
DIY Fall Planter Boxes
DIY Outdoor Garden Cart

If you’d like to save this project for later, don’t forget to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest image with black DIY lamp post and address sign in yard with text "how to build a DIY lamp post"

Until next time, happy building!

How to Build a Chunky Modern Bench

September 26, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a chunky style modern bench that’s perfect for the entryway!

This simple bench is easy to build with basic tools and materials and the thick ends give it character without being “too much.”

DIY red oak bench made from plywood in front of white wall with pillow, art, and flowers

I added it to my new entryway, but it would also work great at the foot of the bed.

One thing I love about freestanding benches is that you can easily move them around and style them in different spaces.

I’ll show you how easy it is to build in the steps, plans, and video below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This is a great beginner woodworking project as it doesn’t require a lot of tools or materials to build. Assembly is simple, quick, and straightforward.

It can be built in an afternoon from just a ½ sheet of plywood and a couple of boards.

Overall dimensions

The overall dimensions of this chunky bench are approximately 15 ⅞″ deep x 16 ⅝″ tall x 48″ wide.

Overall dimensional diagram of DIY chunky bench seat

You can modify the size bigger or smaller to fit your space, but I wouldn’t recommend going too much wider without using thicker/wider piece (like a 2×4) for the seat support . OR adding an additional support in the middle to prevent sagging .

Alternative Assembly Options

The “chunky” ends of the bench are glued up hollow boxes.

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding up hollow plywood box

In the video linked below, I used ¾″ plywood strips for the front and back pieces of these boxes. In hindsight, I wish I’d chosen to use solid wood for these parts, instead. So that is what I’m showing in the plans.

I feel like the grain pattern of the solid pieces would match the edge banding a little better.

If you wanted, you could also cut these larger pieces slightly narrower and glue solid boards over the front and back instead of placing them between the panels. As long as the ends are hollow boxes, you can assemble them multiple ways that would work fine.

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cover plywood edges
  • How to cut plywood sheets
  • How to use a pocket hole jig

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to Build a Modern Bench

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

YouTube Thumbnail image showing bench and cabinet with text "how to build a modern bench + mudroom before& after"

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable modern bench building plans here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Circular Saw
  • Cutting Guides (Kreg Rip Cut and AccuCut–optional)
  • Miter Saw
  • Drill/Driver
  • Pocket Hole Jig

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x4′ sheet ¾” plywood (½ sheet)
  • (2) 1x3x8 boards
  • (1) 100 count box 1 ¼” Pocket Hole Screws
  • Wood Glue
  • Edge banding (optional, but recommended)

Not sure what type of lumber to use for this project?

1x LUMBER: If painting, preprimed pine, spruce, or poplar are great budget friendly options. And if staining, usually, you want to use the same wood type as your plywood so that they match once stained. Check out this post to learn how to shop for and purchase lumber for your project.

PLYWOOD: I recommend using cabinet grade hardwood plywood (like birch, maple, oak, etc). Check out this post to learn how to choose the right plywood for your project.

I used red oak lumber to build the bench shown.

Step 1: Cut Bench End Panels

This project is made mostly from ¾″ plywood, so first, I trimmed my half sheet into a top and four squares. You can find the full cut list and cut diagrams in the printable plans.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing plywood squares in stack on workbench

I set the top aside for now, but kept the squares on hand.

These plywood squares will make the “chunky” ends of the bench, and the front and back edges will be exposed in the finished project.

So I applied iron on edge banding to the two opposite edges running parallel to the wood grain on all four squares.

RELATED: How to apply iron on edge banding

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding up plywood square with arrows showing which edges should be banded

This part is totally optional, but it adds some fun character and detail and only takes a minute.

I looked my squares over and chose my two favorite sides (each panel obviously has two sides, so I picked ONE side from TWO panels that I liked the most).

I set my table saw height to about ¼″ and ran my pieces through to cut two kerfs equally spaced on these two sides.

Shara Woodshop Diaries running plywood squares through table saw to cut kerfs for decoration

If you don’t have a table saw, you can do this with a circ saw and a straight edge instead. Just keep the blade height about ¼″ deep.

This gives the illusion that the panels are glued up planks vs a solid piece.

Step 2: Assemble Bench End “Boxes”

Once my four square panels were cut, I cut a strip of ¾″ plywood to 2 ½″ wide to glue between them to make boxes.

In hindsight, I wish I’d used a solid 1×3 here vs a plywood strip. This worked fine, but I think the grain pattern on a solid piece would have blended at the joints a little better.

I cut four pieces from this strip and glued two between two panels to make a hollow box. Then I repeated to make a second just like it.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood glue to make chunky boxes for DIY bench legs

These boxes will be the bench “legs.” I carefully clamped both sides so the edges are flush and wiped away any glue squeeze out.

Shara Woodshop Diaries clamping sides to make hollow plywood box for DIY chunky bench legs

I was careful to put one kerfed panel on each box and faced the kerfs to the outside. These pieces will be the very ends of the bench and the most visible.

Two hollow plywood boxes glued and clamped on workbench

Prefer to print? Grab the printable chunky bench building plans here.

Step 3: Install Seat Supports

After the glue dried on my “bench boxes” (haha–I’m not sure what to call them!), I cut two pieces of 1×3 to attach between them for the seat supports.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing seat supports for bench seat on workbench

I installed one at the front and one at the back using pocket holes and screws. To give it some dimension, I inset these about 1″ from the outside edge of the boxes, but you could install them flush if you wanted.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes and screws

Step 4: Attach Bench Top

I cut the top panel and set it aside in step 1, so I pulled that back out and applied edge banding to all sides. Edge banding is always optional, but it makes the piece look like solid wood and hides the plies, so it looks a bit nicer.

Then, I applied a bead of wood glue along the top of the entire bench base.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood glue to top of bench base on workbench

I carefully placed the top into the base and made sure it was centered and flush, then clamped it while the glue dried.

Shara Woodshop Diaries clamping plywood bench top to chunky modern bench base on workbench

If you wanted, you could also use figure 8 fasteners, z clips, or add some corner brackets on the inside of the seat supports to attach them to the top.

But, glue alone should hold fine without additional fasteners.

Step 5: Finish

Once the glue dried on the top, I stained the bench with Minwax Weathered Oak (it’s my favorite wood stain on red oak lumber), then applied three coats of Minwax Polycrylic to seal it.

RELATED: How to stain wood

And with that, this simple chunky style bench is finished!

Modern DIY Red oak bench sitting next to red oak cabinet against white wall

I’m using it in my entryway, next to the DIY coat cabinet I shared recently.

Close up of modern chunky style DIY freestanding bench with kerfs cut on side panels next to tall cabinet

But it would also look great on its own in a hallway or at the foot of the bed.

If you’d like to build your own, the printable plans to make it are available here.

Looking for more entryway and DIY bench ideas?

Enjoyed this project, but looking for more? I love sharing projects for the entryway that are simple, practical, and stylish. So I’ve got plenty more ideas you’ll enjoy browsing below.

Click the image(s) to see how to build each one:

DIY Shoe Bench
DIY Mudroom Bench
Easy DIY Boot Tray
Mudroom Built Ins
DIY Storage Bench
One Board Shoe Bench
Simple Bench with Shoe Shelf

If you enjoyed this project, don’t forget to pin this or share to your favorite social media channel to save it for later!

Pinterest collage image showing overall dimensional diagram at top and completed DIY bench seat at bottom with text "how to build a chunky modern bench"

Until next time, friends, happy building!

How to Build a Coat Storage Cabinet

September 19, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how you can build a simple wardrobe cabinet for coat storage.

This double door storage cabinet is a great option to hide coats and jackets in an entryway, a walk in closet, or a bedroom.

Red oak armoire cabinet with double doors for coat storage. One door open to reveal the inside with hooks and a shelf

But it looks so nice, you could also modify it to add more shelves and use it for regular storage (not just for coats and jackets!) in an office or living room.

While somewhat large in size, it’s simple in style and assembly. So you can build it quickly with just a few basic tools.

If you’d like to build your own, I’m sharing the plans, video, and some helpful tips below, so let’s dive in and make some sawdust.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

If you really simplify this project, it’s just a big box. So, it’s incredibly easy to customize in both size and design.

For example, if you leave the doors off and add more shelves, it makes a great bookshelf. Or, keep the doors on and add more shelves, and you’ve got a great little pantry.

DIY coat storage cabinet armoire with double doors open to reveal inside with hooks and shelf and shoe storage

Since this is just a box, the possibilities are practically endless so you may consider swapping the hooks for a hanging rod or the shelves for drawers.

How big should a coat cabinet be?

Armoires and wardrobe cabinets don’t have a standard specific size. Typical armoire cabinet widths range from 36-44″ wide and heights range from 72-78″ tall.

Depending on the storage inside, the depth can vary from 16″ to 24″. However, if you plan to use a hanging rod with clothes hangers (not hooks like shown here), the depth should be at least 20-24″ to accommodate standard sized clothing hangers.

These are COMMON sizes, but you may find some smaller or larger.

The overall dimensions for this project are 17 ⅝″ deep x 33 ¼″ wide x 78″ tall WITHOUT THE CROWN MOLDING.

Overall dimensional diagram of DIY coat wardrobe cabinet

Including the molding, the cabinet measures roughly 19 ¾″ deep x 38 ⅜″ wide x 81″ tall. Exact dimensions will vary depending on the size crown molding used.

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to cut plywood sheets
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to cut crown molding
  • How to use a dowel jig
  • How to install concealed hinges

Want to be the first to know about new projects and plans? Subscribe to the newsletter for priority access!

How to build an Armoire Coat Cabinet

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

Youtube Thumbnail for coat closet cabinet video

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable coat closet cabinet building plans here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Circular Saw
  • Cutting Guides (Kreg Rip Cut and AccuCut–optional)
  • Miter Saw
  • Drill/Driver
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Brad Nailer
  • ⅜″ Dowel Jig
  • Concealed Hinge Jig

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¾” plywood
  • (1) 4’x8′ sheets ¼” plywood
  • (5) 1x3x8 boards
  • (2) 1x2x8 boards
  • (1) 1x6x4 board
  • (4) 8 foot sticks ½″ square dowel or trim
  • 8 foot piece crown molding
  • (1) 100 count box 1 ¼” Pocket Hole Screws
  • (1) 1 lb. box 1 ¼″ wood screws
  • 1 ¼” Brad nails
  • Wood Glue
  • (6) pair 1 ¼″ overlay face frame concealed hinges
  • (24) ⅜″ x 1 ½″ long dowel pins
  • Edge banding (optional)

Not sure what type of lumber to use for this project?

1x LUMBER & TRIM: If painting, preprimed pine, spruce, or poplar are great budget friendly options. And if staining, usually, you want to use the same wood type as your plywood so that they match once stained. Check out this post to learn how to shop for and purchase lumber for your project.

PLYWOOD: I recommend using cabinet grade hardwood plywood (like birch, maple, oak, etc). Check out this post to learn how to choose the right plywood for your project.

I used red oak lumber to build the cabinet shown.

Step 1: Assemble Cabinet Box

To get started, I began cutting down my plywood sheet into two cabinet sides, a top and bottom panel, and a thin support strip to run along the back.

Learn how to cut plywood sheets without a table saw here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting plywood with circular saw on workbench

You can find the full cut list and cut diagrams in the printable coat cabinet building plans here.

Once these pieces were cut, I drilled pocket holes into the top and bottom panels and into the top support strip to assemble.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes in woodworking

After sanding everything well, I assembled the coat cabinet box with pocket hole screws. As you see in the photo below, the top support strip is installed directly below the top support of the cabinet flush to the back.

The top support will be used to secure the cabinet to the wall once completed.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling coat armoire cabinet with pocket hole screws on workbench

And the bottom support is installed about 6″ up from the bottom of the sides (this allows for adding a trim piece later).

Step 2: Install Back Panel

Once the cabinet box was assembled, I needed to add the back. Now, in the printable plans, I share two different ways to install the back panel. You can simply cut a ¼″ plywood piece to fit on the back and staple/nail/screw it on.

OR, you can use a router and a rabbeting bit to route along the back of the cabinet to inset the back panel into.

Shara Woodshop Diaries using a router to cut rabbet on back side of armoire cabinet in workshop floor

Because both sides of my cabinet will be exposed and I was planning to stain it, the exposed plywood edges of the back panel would be visible in the finished project.

That’s why I opted to route a rabbet: so my plywood panel would sit inset and hide the edges.

After routing, I cut a piece of ¼″ plywood to fit into my rabbet and stapled it along the back side.

Shara Woodshop Diaries stapling ¼" plywood back panel onto tall storage cabinet

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans to build this wardrobe cabinet here.

Step 3: Add Face Frame

Next, I assembled a face frame to fit onto the front of the cabinet. I built the face frame from solid wood 1x2s and 1x3s (1x2s on the sides and 1x3s on the top and bottom) and assembled using pocket holes and screws.

A standard size pocket hole jig can work fine, BUT, when building face frames, I recommend using a Kreg Micro Jig with pan head pocket hole screws. The smaller holes and screws are less likely to cause splits.

Learn more about how, when, and why to use the Kreg Micro Jig here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling the face frame for the entryway coat cabinet with pocket holes and screws

After making sure the face frame did, in fact, fit the cabinet (always double check!), I applied a bead of wood glue along the front edge, placed the frame on top and brad nailed it in place.

Shara Woodshop Diaries using brad nailer to secure face frame to coat cabinet box

Step 4: Install Shelf & Hook Supports

I cut a strip of ¾″ plywood to about 6″ wide and cut two short and one long support to kind of “line” the inside of the cabinet to support the shelf.

This part is a little backwards from what I share in the printable plans because when I built it, I wasn’t thinking about how to attach the back piece.

Ideally, after routing in step 2, I should have attached the back support between the cabinet sides before adding the back panel. But, I didn’t realize it until later.

So instead, I screwed the two short supports onto each side of the cabinet about ¾″ inset from the back edge. Then I could slide the back support in behind it like you see below.

¾" plywood strips clamped to inside of tall cabinet box for shelf supports

You can see this in more detail in the video, but from there, I drove screws from the back side of the cabinet to secure the back support.

Then, I cut a piece of ¾″ plywood to rest across these supports as a shelf. I brad nailed to secure it, but you could also use screws if you wanted.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing shelf into tall storage cabinet with brad nailer

NOTE: Notice that the front edges of the supports and the shelf are edge banded so they look like solid wood vs plywood. This is optional, but it makes it look a bit more finished, so I recommend it. Learn how to apply edge banding here.

TIP: The shelf supports will also be where I install the hooks to hang coats on. If you don’t want hooks or you want to add more shelving into this cabinet, feel free to skip adding the shelf supports and simply drill shelf pin holes to add adjustable shelves.

Learn how to install adjustable shelves into any project here.

Step 5: Add Trim

The last part to finish up the cabinet is adding some trim along the top and bottom to give it some extra dimensions and dress it up a bit.

I cut to fit and installed some crown molding around the top, then cut to fit and glued a piece of 1×6 board along the bottom like you see below.

RELATED: How to cut crown molding

Tall coat storage cabinet laid on its back on workshop floor with crown molding and 1x6 baseboard trim clamped onto bottom

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this armoire storage cabinet here.

Step 6: Build & Install Doors

Now that the cabinet is complete, all that’s left is the doors. I cut 1×3 boards to build two identical door frames from and I assembled the frames using wood glue and dowels.

RELATED: How to use a dowel jig

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling tall cabinet door frame with wood glue and dowels

There are a lot of ways to build a cabinet door, but I personally like to keep it as simple as possible. In this case, I had some scrap trim left over from several previous projects that was about ½″ square.

So I cut to fit these pieces to line the inside openings in my door frames. If I install these flush to the front edge of my frame (which is ¾″ thick), that leaves a ¼″ recess on the back to be able to add ¼″ plywood door panels.

Shara Woodshop Diaries demonstrating how trim pieces will line inside of door frame openings

TIP: ½″ square dowels or any small decorative trim (½″ or smaller) can work here.

Once cut, I carefully glued these trim pieces into my door openings.

Shara Woodshop Diaries clamping small trim pieces to line door openings for coat storage cabinet

Then, I cut to fit ¼″ plywood panels to fit into the back side and glued these into each door frame.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable coat storage cabinet plans here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing ¼" plywood door panels into door frame

After the glue was dry on the door panels, before installing them, I went ahead and stained the cabinet and the doors separately (I used Minwax Weathered Oak), then applied a few coats of Minwax Polycrylic to seal it.

Once the finish was dry, I installed three concealed hinges (overlay face frame hinges) onto each door, then hung the doors onto the cabinet.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing cabinet doors onto wardrobe cabinet

RELATED: How to choose the right hinges for your project

ALSO RELATED: How to install concealed hinges

Step 7: Finish & Install

To finish up, I installed some simple door pulls to each door and magnetic catches (optional) to help keep the doors closed tight. Then, I added some hooks to the shelf supports inside the cabinet to be able to hang hats, coats, bags, etc.

And now this coat storage cabinet is ready for my entryway!

Completed red oak wardrobe cabinet with double doors and crown molding

I’ll be moving this into my mudroom very soon and when I do, I’ll secure it to the wall studs through the top support I mentioned in step 1.

Completed DIY coat wardrobe cabinet with double doors open to show coats hanging inside

I love that there’s a place for shoes below, a shelf for accessories at the top, and plenty of room for hanging coats and hats in the middle.

Double door wardrobe cabinet with one door open to reveal inside

Looking for more DIY Armoire Cabinet Projects?

Enjoyed this project, but looking for more ideas? These types of tall storage cabinets are some of my favorites to build, so I’ve got plenty more you’ll enjoy browsing below.

Click the image(s) to see how to build each one:

DIY Armoire Cabinet
DIY Wardobe with Drawer
DIY Display Cabinet
How to Build a Pantry Cabinet
How to Build a Larder Cabinet
How to Build Your Own Stand Alone DIY Closet Cabinets With Clothes rod and adjustable shelves and even a shoe rack!
DIY Freestanding Closet Cabinets

If you enjoyed this project, don’t forget to pin this or share to your favorite social media channel to save it for later!

Pinterest collage image showing overall dimensional diagram at top and completed storage cabinet at bottom with text "how to build a coat storage cabinet with plans"

Until next time, friends, happy building!

Easy & Inexpensive DIY Picture Frame

August 26, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how you can make easy and inexpensive picture frames that look anything but “cheap.”

These classic picture frames can be made with just one power tool and a few pieces of common lumber.

Shara Woodshop Diaries hanging one of three wooden DIY picture frames on wall

So whether you’re framing brand new prints, or you have existing prints or frames that could use an nice upgrade, this is the tutorial you’re looking for.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This is a super quick and easy project you can easily complete in just an hour or two (and that includes the time for the glue and stain to dry).

You can make a matching set if you have a coordinating set of prints, or you can make different sizes or stain them different colors for a unique gallery wall. Feel free to get creative!

Using an Existing Frame

I recommend either using an existing picture frame or buying some cheap frame sets for the “inner parts.”

I opted to buy this 5 pack of inexpensive frames and I removed everything inside–the plexiglass, picture mat, and backer board. I’ll reuse these pieces in my new wooden frame and just toss this cheap black plastic frame.

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding up cheap black picture frame in workshop

If you wanted, you can certainly buy or cut the plexiglass, picture mat and backer board separately, but it’s often cheaper to just buy a cheap frame and “recycle” these parts if you’re making a small or standard size frame.

Plus, the backer on these frames already has hangers installed on it, so I won’t have to add those to my new frames when I build them.

Back side of cheap picture frame backer board

Keep in mind that picture frames come in lots of sizes so make sure to select the size you’d like. The frames I bought were 11×14, but matted to 8×10.

Choosing trim options

For these frames, I used a 1×3 for the main board, ¼″ x ¾″ lattice trim for the inside and small chair rail molding for the outside edge.

pine 1x3, chair rail molding and lattice trim laid on workbench

However, if you wanted a chunkier frame, you could use a 1×4 or 1×6 in place of the 1×3. Or, if you’re not a fan of the chair rail molding, you can swap that for half round, cove, or another small molding you like better.

Feel free to use whatever type of wood you’d like for this, but I kept it simple and inexpensive by using pine.

Picture Frame Sizing

Obviously picture frames come in a variety of sizes. Some of the more common sizes are 5×7, 8×10, 11×14, 16×20, and 24×36.

You can build these picture frames to just about any size you’d like, but the amount of material needed will vary based on the size frame you’re making.

For reference, I used about 6′ of board (1×3 plus trim–see notes above) to make one 11×14 frame. So if you go bigger, you’ll need more material and if you go smaller, you’ll need less.

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to Make a Wooden Picture Frame

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

Youtube Thumbnail for DIY picture frames

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Clamps or Ratchet Strap

Materials:

  • 1×3 board (length depends on picture frame size–see notes above)
  • Small Molding*
  • ¼″ x ¾″ lattice trim
  • Wood Glue
  • Painters Tape
  • Turn Buttons
  • Sawtooth hanger (optional)

*You can choose any type of molding profile you’d like for this. Cove, half round, or small chair rail would all work well. See notes above.

Step 1: Glue up Picture Frame Boards

To get started, I cut a piece of 1×3, small chair rail molding and ¼″ x ¾″ lattice trim to about 72″ long. I applied a small bead of glue to the back of the chair rail molding.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood glue to chair rail molding to glue up picture frame

Then flipped it over on the 1×3 and used some painters tape to hold it flush along the edge while the glue dried.

Using painters tape to secure chair rail molding to wood board for picture frame

This chair rail molding is just for decorative purposes, but the lattice trim is what is used on the inside to hold the picture in the frame.

So the lattice needs to be installed inset from the back edge of the 1×3 about the thickness of the inside parts of the frame (the plexiglass, mat, and backer). That way the picture can be INSET the back edge and rest against the lattice. See image below.

Test fitting lattice trim piece on 1x3 board for offset for picture frame

So I found a thin piece of wood scrap about this thickness in my trash can and placed this underneath my lattice trim piece while I glued and clamped it to the edge of my 1×3 (see image below).

Gluing lattice trim on edge of 1x3 with spacer block on workbench

TIP: You could also use some shims, folded paper or pretty much anything about this thickness if you didn’t have a wood scrap.

I was making three 11×14 frames, so I repeated this step to make three 72″ long boards just like this. Remember, if you’re making a different size frame, you may need a longer or shorter board.

Step 2: Paint or Stain

Before cutting and assembling my frames, I went ahead and stained each glued up board. I wanted my frames to be different colors, so I stained them:

  • Minwax Water Based Solid Stain in Autumn Wheat (it’s like a light tan)
  • Minwax Water Based Semi Transparent Stain in Pecan (shown below)
  • Miwnax Water Based Semi Transparent Stain in True Black
Applying wood stain to picture frame board with a rag

You definitely don’t have to stain them before assembling, I just thought it might be a bit easier.

RELATED: How to stain wood

Step 3: Trim Picture Frame Sides

Once the stain was dry, I started trimming down my boards. Each piece of the frame should be mitered, so I adjusted the miter angle on my miter saw to 45 degrees and cut off one end.

The miters should all be cut so that the side with the lattice trim is the shorter side.

Miter saw set to 45 degrees cut end off picture frame board

Once one end was cut, I adjusted my miter saw 45 degrees the other way to make the next cut the opposite way.

For each frame, I cut two pieces so that the INSIDE EDGE OF THE 1×3 (not including the lattice trim) was 11″ long and two more so that the inside edge of the 1×3 was 14″.

Miter saw set to 45 degrees opposite direction to cut other end of picture frame piece

Then I test fit my pieces together. The opening should be a bit under the desired picture size.

Dry fitting four sides of DIY picture frame together on workbench

I flipped these pieces over and made sure that the 11″ x 14″ picture frame backing I was using fit did, in fact, fit the frame.

Test fitting backer board into frame on workbench

It should fit inside the 1x3s and rest on the lattice trim.

Step 4: Glue up Frame

Once I confirmed my sizing, I applied wood glue on the ends of each board and clamped the frame together. If you wanted to also use some dowels. pocket holes or staples, you could.

Applying wood glue to ends of picture frame pieces to assemble

I clamped each corner flush, then clamped across each direction. If you don’t have regular clamps, you could use a ratchet strap around the edge as a clamp, too.

Using clamps to hold picture frame together while glue dries

After the glue dried, I touched up the stain as needed at the corners.

Step 5: Install Turn Buttons & Hang

Next, I installed some turn buttons on the back of each frame. These simply rotate to allow you to hold the picture inside the frame.

Installing turn buttons on back of wooden picture frame with screwdriver

The existing backer piece from my frames had these little brackets to hold them in the frame it came with, but they’re not needed in my new frame, so I used some pliers to pop them off.

But I kept the hangers on the back that they came with. If your backer doesn’t have a hanger already installed, you can add a simple sawtooth hanger onto the wood frame to hang it from.

Installing plexiglass, mat, picture, and backer board into wooden picture frame with turn buttons

I placed my plexiglass, mat, photo, and backer into the frame, secured with the turn buttons, and now they’re ready to hang!

Shara Woodshop Diaries hanging wooden DIY picture frames on the wall--three different color frames with greenery prints inside
Three different color wooden picture frames hanging on wall

Looking for more DIY picture frame ideas?

If you’re still browsing for more picture frame ideas, here are a few of my favorites! Click on the image(s) below to see how to build each one:

EASY DIY Desktop Picture Frames
HUGE DIY Picture Frames
3 Easy DIY Floating Picture Frame Ideas {And how to cut plexiglass}
How to make your own Custom DIY Picture Frame for any size picture or print you want to frame. Save hundreds by making your own with these plans!
DIY Large Custom Picture Frame

If you enjoyed this project and want to save it for later, don’t forget to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing parts of picture frame at top and Shara Woodshop Diaries hanging picture frames on bottom with text "quick and easy DIY picture frames"

Until next time, happy building!

DIY Scrap Wood Desk Organizer

August 22, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a simple desk organizer from scrap wood.

I’ve been meaning to make one of these for a long time to help with the piles of mail, files, notes, and paperwork covering up my desk. (Please tell me I’m not the only one with that problem??)

DIY desk organizer with file folders and notebook on desk with flowers in vase

This simple solution allows me to keep my notes and important papers handy and accessible, but lets me to categorize them and store them “up” vs “out” so they take up less space on my desk.

You could also use this organizer as storage for books, cutting boards, and more.

The simplest projects are sometimes the most versatile. So if you’re in need of a little organization help, I’m sharing how to build your own below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

Building this simple desk organizer is a quick project that you can likely complete in less than an hour.

You only need a few small pieces of wood, so I highly recommend digging around in your scrap pile to see what you can use before buying any new material.

For this project, I used some scrap 1x construction lumber. I had a scrap board that was 7 ½″ wide and another board that was about 8″ wide. But these dimensions don’t have to be specific.

Spruce lumber on workbench--scraps used to make desk organizer

A 1×6, 1×8, 1×10 board or some ¾″ plywood could all work well, so feel free to use what you have on hand.

I used a combination of pocket hole screws and regular wood screws to assemble this organizer. But if you wanted to use wood glue and brad/finish nails instead, that could work fine, too. The pocket hole jig is totally optional.

Additionally, I used a miter saw to cut my pieces to size, then used a jig saw to cut the curves. But if you wanted to cut it all with a jig saw, you can. Or, if you didn’t want to cut the curves, then you don’t need a jig saw.

There are plenty of options in building this simple desk organizer, so, just like with the lumber, I encourage you to make do with whatever tools you have, too.

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to Build a Scrap Wood Desk Organizer

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional information here:

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter saw (optional)
  • Jig Saw
  • Drill/Driver
  • Pocket Hole Jig (optional)

Materials:

  • Scrap 1×8 or 1×10 boards (or other as desired)
  • 1 ¼″ pocket hole screws
  • 2″ wood screws

Step 1: Cut Scrap Wood to Size

First, I used my miter saw to cut 6 pieces from my scrap boards. Like I mentioned earlier, these measurements don’t have to be exactly the same as mine, but my pieces ended up being:

  • (1) Bottom: 7 ½″ x 9 ½″
  • (2) Sides: 8″ x 7 ¾″
  • (3) Dividers: 7 ½″ x 7″
Dimensional diagram, exploded view of desk organizer parts

One of my scrap boards happened to be 8″ wide and the other was 7 ½″. So I ended up cutting my sides from the 8″ wide board–that’s why they’re a bit wider than the rest of my pieces.

I could have trimmed them down to match so everything would be 7 ½″ wide, but I left them as is.

Step 2: Cut curve in Dividers & Sides

I wanted my sides and dividers to have a curve so I used a five gallon bucket to trace a curve on the top front corner of all three dividers and side pieces.

Shara Woodshop Diaries tracing curve on board using 5 gallon bucket

Once this was traced, I cut along the line with a jig saw and sanded them to smooth it out.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting curve with jig saw

Then, I test fit my pieces together to make sure I liked the shape. If you want to modify the height or shape of any of the pieces to better fit your look or needs, now’s the time!

DIY desk organizer parts dry fit together on workbench

Step 3: Finish Organizer Pieces Separately

Before attaching anything together, I decided to go ahead and stain my pieces separately. I stained the bottom, sides and all three dividers with Minwax Water Based Wood Stain in Semi-Transparent Driftwood.

Shara Woodshop Diaries staining pieces separately before assembling

The great thing about water based stains is that they dry really fast, so I didn’t really have to wait after staining to start assembly.

RELATED: How to stain wood

Step 4: Attach Bottom to Sides

I drilled pocket holes into the ends of the bottom piece and attached it between the sides with pocket holes and screws.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling desk organizer on workbench with pocket hole screws

Since the sides were wider than the bottom piece, I just allowed them to overhang the front and back equal distance (about ¼″). You can see this in the image above.

TIP: If you wanted to use wood glue and brad nails or screws through the sides instead of pocket holes, that’s totally fine.

Step 5: Install Desk Organizer Dividers

Now that the sides were on, all that’s left is installing the dividers. I wanted them to be equally spaced, which ended up being about 2″ apart.

So I found a 2″ wide piece of scrap wood to help me keep my dividers spaced as I attached them (see image below). Once I clamped the divider into position, I removed the spacer block, flipped it over and drove 2″ screws through the bottom to secure it.

Shara Woodshop Diaries clamping desk organizer divider pieces before securing with screws

If you didn’t want to use screws, glue and brad nails could also work. Once one was attached, I used the spacer block to position the next one and repeated to add all three.

Close up of driving screws through bottom of desk organizer to attach dividers

Then, it was ready for my desk! Each section is the perfect size for mail, a notebook, file folders and papers.

Completed DIY desk organizer with curved dividers
DIY scrap wood desk organizer with curved dividers

Looking for More Scrap Wood DIYs?

Can’t get enough scrap wood projects?? I’m teaming up with my friend, Kati, from Houseful of Handmade all month long for “Scrap Wood Summer!”

Check out all the projects in the series below. Click on the images to learn how to make each one!

Umbrella Stand Side Table
Hanging Bird Bath
Mug Holder Shelf
Harvest Basket
Wooden Riser
Scalloped Planter
Desk Organizer
Dog Bowl Stand

This is our fourth year hosting Scrap Wood Summer and I enjoy it a little more each time. But, if you’ve never heard of it before, that’s okay!

Essentially, we each share a new scrap wood project every Tuesday throughout the month of August. So by the end of the month, you’ve got 8 new project ideas to try.

So stay tuned to see all the other fun ideas we are so excited to share with you!

Can’t wait? Check out previous Scrap Wood Summer projects plus other scrap wood ideas here.

If you’d like to save this DIY umbrella stand table for later, be sure to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing scrap wood at top on workbench and completed DIY desk organizer at bottom on desk with flowers

Until next time, friends, happy building!

DIY Scrap Wood Risers

August 18, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing three easy ways to make a DIY wooden riser from scrap wood!

Lately, I feel like every time I go to the store, I see wooden risers all over the home décor section.

Assorted wooden risers in different shapes and sizes on workbench top with plant and glasses resting on one

If you’re not familiar with a what a “riser” is, basically it’s like a tray on some kind of legs or feet so that it “rises” above the surface.

They make excellent plant stands, but are often used as a place to corral like items. You often seen them on kitchen countertops, on bathroom vanities, or coffee tables.

They’re super cute, but I have a hard time paying for one at the store when I know I could make a hundred of them from the scraps in my workshop for free!

So in this post, I’m sharing three easy ways to make a wooden riser from wood scraps and just a few minutes of your time.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

There are a million ways (literally) to make a simple wooden riser. I’m sharing three basic options (plus some alternative customizations) in this post, but these certainly are not the ONLY ways to make them.

Depending on what kind of scraps you’re working with, you can make a wooden riser from practically any material, and just about any size (within reason) you can think of.

Since I was making a few different styles, I chose a couple of “specialty” options–a thick piece of red oak (leftover from building this dining table), some 2x cedar (leftover from building my driveway gates), and a thinner piece of hickory.

Red oak, cedar, and hickory scrap wood laying on workbench

And I also grabbed a couple pieces of scrap pine leftover from building this hutch for my pantry.

Scrap pine boards laying on workbench

As you can see, there are no “rules” to the size of type of wood for this project, so feel free to pick just about anything.

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to Make a Wooden Riser

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional information here:

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Jig Saw (optional)
  • Clamps
  • Brad Nailer (optional)

Materials:

  • Wood Scraps (various sizes can work fine)
  • Wood Glue
  • Painters Tape (optional)

Method 1: Making a DIY Wooden Riser with Feet

This way of making a wooden riser is one of the quickest and simplest options, but allows for plenty of customizations.

To make one, I cut four wooden blocks from a scrap piece of 2×2 to use as “feet.” Then, I cut a piece of scrap 2×8 board to use as the top.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting wooden feet to make DIY wooden riser on miter saw

I cut the 2x2s to 1 ½″ long to make them cubes ( because 2x2s are 1 ½″ square). Since I was using a thick top (2x board), I thought it looked right proportionately to use “thick” feet.

2x8 cedar block with four cubes on top to make riser

After sanding, I carefully glued the wooden blocks at each corner of the 2×8 board and allowed to dry.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying glue to wooden cubes to glue onto cedar board

If you wanted, you could nail, screw or clamp these feet in place while the glue dries.

Once dry, I stained this cedar riser with Minwax Water Based Stain in Autumn Wheat to finish it.

Completed scrap wood cedar riser with 2x2s for feet

Customization Ideas:

You can customize your riser several different ways, but one option is to use different items for the feet.

Swap the 2x2s for 1x2s to make it shorter, cut your 2x2s longer and turn them on end to make your riser taller. Or, use wooden balls, furniture feet, wooden dowels, or drawer knobs in place of plain boards for the feet.

RELATED: How to make a wooden riser with wood balls for feet

Another option to customize is to cut a shape or a handle in the riser top. For example, I made a second riser using this method out of scrap pine 1×8. Before gluing on the feet, I used a jig saw to cut a handle shape out of one end of the 1×8 board.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting handle shape out of pine board to make wooden riser

This is very similar to the handle I cut on these scrap wood serving boards.

Once the shape was cut, I cut four pieces of scrap 1×2 to glue and nail onto the bottom for the feet.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing and nailing scrap boards onto bottom of pine board with handle cut out

I stained this one in Minwax Water Based Wood Stain in Black. The handle gives this version a little more character.

Finished pine riser board with handle stained black

So feel feet to get creative with this method. Essentially it’s just gluing some sort of feet onto a board to create a riser.

Method 2: Making a Wooden Riser with Waterfall Edges

This method involves cutting a board so that the grain creates a “waterfall” edge on each side.

To make this type of riser, I adjusted my miter saw’s bevel angle to 45 degrees. Then I cut a piece off one end of a scrap 1×8 board. The length of this piece doesn’t have to be a specific dimension.

RELATED: How to cut angles on a miter saw

Cut a longer piece for a taller riser and a shorter piece for a shorter riser. I cut mine about 1 ½″ long.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting waterfall edge pieces of wooden riser on miter saw

Once a piece was cut off one end, I flipped the board over to trim the beveled end the other direction. In order to have continuous grain, I basically needed to “notch” a triangle portion out of the bottom of the board (see image below).

Then, I repeated on the other end of the board so that I had two end pieces the same size and a center (top) board.

I placed these on my workbench like shown in the image below and used some painters tape to tape along the seams.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying painters tape to board joints for glue up

Then, I flipped this over and applied wood glue to the beveled edges.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying wood glue to beveled joints of wooden riser

Then, I could fold up both ends and clamp to tighten the joints. I used an old rag to wipe away as much glue squeeze out as I could, especially on the inside corners, then allowed to dry.

Shara Woodshop Diaries clamping waterfall edge riser board so glue can dry

After the glue was dry, I removed the clamps and the tape and sanded the joints smooth before applying a finish (Minwax Water Based Wood Stain in Pecan).

Finished wooden riser with continuous grain waterfall edge stained dark brown

This method of making a riser is especially neat if you have a scrap board with a unique grain pattern so you can see it wrapped around all sides–like this version made from a piece of hickory.

Close up of hickory riser with continuous grain pattern wrapping around edge

Method 3: Making a DIY Wooden Riser on Runners

This method of making a scrap wood riser is similar to method 1 above, but this time, instead of cutting feet from a separate board, I trimmed “runners” from the same board to just glue along the bottom.

For example, I had a thick piece of scrap red oak lumber, and I trimmed 1″ long strips off each end of the board.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting end off red oak board

Then, I simply glued and clamped these on the bottom of the board–one on each end. With this method, it almost looks like you cut out the bottom middle section of a really thick board.

The wood grain lines up along the front and along the edges, so it blends together really well.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing runners on bottom of red oak board to make DIY wooden riser

After the glue dried, and it was stained (Minwax Water Based Wood Stain in Driftwood), it kind of looks like an extra chunky wood block.

Finished red oak wooden riser--chunky legs and board

An alternative option is, if you have a wider board to work with, to rip strips off the edges of the board instead of the ends.

Then, trim these strips to fit and glue and brad nail them onto the bottom of the board as runners.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing and nailing runners on bottom of riser board

With this option, the wood grain doesn’t match up (edge grain and end grain aren’t all on the same edges), but it still creates a useful riser and is a great way to use up a piece of wider scrap wood.

Finished pine wood riser with edge pieces glued along ends with plant and book on top

Looking for More Scrap Wood DIYs?

Can’t get enough scrap wood projects?? I’m teaming up with my friend, Kati, from Houseful of Handmade all month long for “Scrap Wood Summer!”

Check out all the projects in the series below. Click on the images to learn how to make each one!

Umbrella Stand Side Table
Hanging Bird Bath
Mug Holder Shelf
Harvest Basket
Wooden Riser
Scalloped Planter
Desk Organizer
Dog Bowl Stand

This is our fourth year hosting Scrap Wood Summer and I enjoy it a little more each time. But, if you’ve never heard of it before, that’s okay!

Essentially, we each share a new scrap wood project every Tuesday throughout the month of August. So by the end of the month, you’ve got 8 new project ideas to try.

So stay tuned to see all the other fun ideas we are so excited to share with you!

Can’t wait? Check out previous Scrap Wood Summer projects plus other scrap wood ideas here.

If you’d like to save this DIY umbrella stand table for later, be sure to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing scrap pine boards at top and assorted DIY scrap wood risers at bottom with text "how to make scrap wood risers" and "turn this into this" with arrows

Until next time, friends, happy building!

How to Build a Mug Display Shelf

August 11, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a simple DIY mug display shelf using scrap plywood!

I have a mug problem. Well…I’m not sure “problem” is the right word. It’s more like a mug collection that might be a bit out of hand (depends on who you ask haha).

red oak plywood DIY mug shelf wall mounted with four mugs in cubbies

I just like to have a variety of mug options for my morning coffee for each season–some for spring/summer, some for Christmastime, but most of my mugs are fall themed. Those are acceptable for year-round use because fall is my favorite 🙂

Anyway, my mug collection brings me a lot of joy but it’s a little sad they stay hidden away in the cabinet, only to be seen each morning when I reach in to grab one.

So I decided to build a simple mug shelf to keep my favorite mugs organized and on display during their appropriate season.

This is a great little project to use up some of those plywood scraps on, so if you’d like to see how to make one of your own, I’ve got the details below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

I built this DIY mug shelf using scrap (red oak, but other types would work fine) plywood. I used ½″ plywood for the back panel and ¾″ plywood for the sides, shelves and dividers.

But, you could build the entire thing using all ½″ plywood, all ¾″ plywood, or use solid 1x boards instead of plywood.

There’s no “hard rules” here on what materials to use to build this with, so I encourage you to take a look at your scrap pile and see what you’ve got to work with.

Mug Shelf Sizing

This mug shelf ended up being about 5 ½″ deep x 18″ wide x 18″ tall. It’s got 9 “cubbies” for mugs all 5″ cubed (so each section is 5″ x 5″ x 5″).

DIY Mug shelf sizing diagram showing overall dimensions of 18" x 18" x 5 ½"

If you wanted to make a mug shelf with more rows or columns and with smaller or larger cubbies, feel free to customize it. See step 1 for tips on adjusting the size.

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to Build a Mug Shelf

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional information here:

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Micro Pocket Hole Jig (optional)
  • Drill/Driver (optional)
  • Brad Nailer
  • Clamps
  • Table Saw or Circ Saw (optional–to cut plywood as needed)

Materials:

  • ½″ plywood (for back panel)
  • ¾″ plywood OR 1×6 boards (for sides and shelves)
  • 1 ¼″ brad nails
  • 1 ¼″ pocket hole screws (optional)
  • Wood Glue
  • Edge Banding

Step 1: Cut Backer

For this shelf, I used scrap ½″ plywood for the backer. If you didn’t have ½″ plywood, ¾″ would also work fine.

*I used red oak plywood scraps for this, but you can use any wood type you have available.

Since I was working with scraps, I didn’t have a lot of flexibility on size. The piece I had was about 16 ½″ wide, so I just marked it at 16 ½″ long and cut it so it was square.

Shara Woodshop Diaries measuring and marking ½" plywood 16 ½" square on workbench

A note about sizing: Before cutting the back, I recommend measuring your mugs to get their overall dimensions.

Since I cut my back piece 16 ½″ square, after I add two ¾″ plywood shelves and dividers, that leaves me with nine 5″ square cubbies. This size seemed to work well for most of my mugs, but if yours are larger or you want to add another row/column, adjust your back panel size as needed.

Then, I drilled pocket holes along all four edges of my back panel. When drilling pocket holes in ½″ thick material, I prefer to use the Kreg Micro pocket hole jig, but a standard size jig can also work.

Learn how and why to use the Kreg Micro Pocket Hole Jig here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling pocket holes in ½" plywood backer for mug shelf

Step 2: Attach Mug Shelf Sides

Next, I ripped some ¾″ plywood scraps to 5 ½″ wide and cut these to fit around my backer panel.

*If you didn’t want to use plywood, 1×6 scraps would also work well here for the sides since they’re already 5 ½″ wide.

Because I was using plywood here, I laid my pieces out and marked which edges will be exposed when assembled so that I could apply edge banding.

Shara Woodshop Diaries marking mug shelf sides to edge band on workbench

Edge banding is optional, but it just makes these edges look a lot cleaner. Learn how to cover plywood edges with banding here.

So I applied iron on edge banding to the front edges of the side pieces before attaching them around the backer with pocket hole screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling mug display shelf back panel with pocket hole screws

After the sides were secured around the back panel, I tacked the corners together with a couple brad nails.

Close up of brad nailing corners of plywood box together on workbench

Step 3: Install Shelves

Next, it was time to add the shelves, so I ripped some more ¾″ plywood to 5″ wide and cut two pieces to fit inside the box. I applied some more iron on edge banding to the front edges of these shelves.

Then, I applied wood glue to the back edge, and slid them into the box making sure they were evenly spaced (about 5″ space between each shelf and the top/bottom).

Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing shelves into plywood box

I tacked these in on each side with a few brad nails. If you wanted to use wood screws instead, you can.

TIP: Use a speed square to make sure shelves stay level and square as you nail them in place.

Step 4: Add Dividers

Adding dividers is optional–you can stop after step 3 and just have simple shelves. But these dividers added a little more interest.

To make them, I ripped some more scrap ¾″ plywood to 5″ wide, then cut twelve 1″ long pieces from that.

It was tedious, but I applied edge banding to one short and one long side of each of these pieces to cover the plywood edges. If you had solid wood to use for these dividers, that might be a better choice.

Then, I glued and clamped them like shown below onto the top and bottom of each shelf to divide the cubbies.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing dividers into shelf to separate cubbies for each mug

I carefully measured that these dividers were evenly spaced (should be about 5″ between each divider and the sides) as I glued them on.

Step 5: Finish and Hang

Once the glue was dry, I stained my shelf in Minwax Weathered Oak, and gave it a few coats of clear poly (I used Minwax Polycrylic in the spray can so it was easier to apply in all these little nooks and crannies.)

Then, I secured it to the wall studs with screws through the back panel making sure to keep it level.

Wall mounted mug shelf with arrow pointing to screw used to secure it to wall studs through back panel

*I recommend using at least two screws to hang this because with just one screw, it can twist and become unlevel.

And now it’s ready for my favorite mugs of the season. This is such a fun addition to add to the kitchen or pantry or in the coffee bar if you have one.

Completed DIY wall mounted mug display shelf made from scrap plywood with four mugs

It’s designed to hang on the wall, but can also sit on the countertop, if you’d like. I hope this gave you a fun idea to use up some of those plywood scraps!

By the way, if mugs aren’t your thing, this makes a great way to display other things like baseballs, awards, toy cars and other collectibles, too!

Looking for More Scrap Wood DIYs?

Can’t get enough scrap wood projects?? I’m teaming up with my friend, Kati, from Houseful of Handmade all month long for “Scrap Wood Summer!”

Check out all the projects in the series below. Click on the images to learn how to make each one!

Umbrella Stand Side Table
Hanging Bird Bath
Mug Holder Shelf
Harvest Basket
Wooden Riser
Scalloped Planter
Desk Organizer
Dog Bowl Stand

This is our fourth year hosting Scrap Wood Summer and I enjoy it a little more each time. But, if you’ve never heard of it before, that’s okay!

Essentially, we each share a new scrap wood project every Tuesday throughout the month of August. So by the end of the month, you’ve got 8 new project ideas to try.

So stay tuned to see all the other fun ideas we are so excited to share with you!

Can’t wait? Check out previous Scrap Wood Summer projects plus other scrap wood ideas here.

If you’d like to save this DIY umbrella stand table for later, be sure to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing assembling mug shelf on workbench at top and completed DIY scrap wood mug shelf on bottom with text "how to build a mug shelf"

Until next time, friends, happy building!

How to Build a Cabinet Organizer Drawer

August 7, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a cabinet organizer pull out drawer from scrap plywood!

This design is unique because the entire organizer pulls out of the cabinet, but the small upper drawer can slide back into the cabinet for easy access to what’s stored below.

DIY cabinet organizer drawer installed into base kitchen cabinet with tupperware containers at bottom and lids in top drawer

This is great for things like Tupperware storage (as shown above). But it would also work great for storing bulky kitchen items, like mixing bowls, in the bottom drawer and smaller accessories, like hand mixers, cookie cutters, etc., in the top drawer.

No matter what you plan to store inside, it’s an excellent addition that you can easily add into your existing cabinets to make time spent in the kitchen a little more efficient (aka not spent digging around your cabinets to find what you need).

So if your kitchen could use a little more organization, I’m sharing all the details on how to build and install this cabinet organizer drawer below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This is a super quick, super simple project that you can easily complete in just an hour or two. The simple design is easy to customize to any size cabinet, but I recommend putting it into one of your bigger base cabinets, if possible.

While it can work in smaller cabinets, it may end up being a bit too small to practically store large items.

Material choices

I recommend building this from cabinet grade hardwood plywood. This is what most cabinets are built with, so it will blend in well, but it’s also strong, durable, and smooth.

Learn how to choose the best plywood for your project here.

This project can be built from entirely ¾″ plywood, entirely ½″ plywood or a combination of both. I built the one shown here using ¾″ plywood for the drawer sides and ½″ plywood for the drawer bottoms.

Because this is highly customizable and doesn’t require a lot of lumber, I encourage you to check your scrap pile as you may be able to get everything you need from there without having to buy any lumber!

RELATED: How to build a scrap wood cart to organize scrap plywood

How to measure your cabinet

You can built this organizer to fit just about any size cabinet, so before getting started, I needed to take some careful measurements of the cabinet this is going into.

First, I measured my cabinet opening height and got about 20 ½″. So I know my organizer needs to be shorter than this–I made mine about 18 ½″ tall total.

Using tape measure to measure height of base cabinet opening

Next, I measured my cabinet depth. My cabinet has a face frame, so I measured from the back of the cabinet to the back edge of the face frame. It was a little over, but I rounded down to 22″ for some wiggle room.

Using a tape measure to measure the cabinet depth front to back

Now, this organizer will be installed onto drawer slides, and since I have a face frame, I needed to install some spacer blocks to mount my slides onto so they can slide in and out. Learn more about installing drawer slides here.

My face frame overhangs the inside of my cabinet 1 ⅛″ on both sides.

Using a tape measure to measure face frame overhang on inside of cabinet box

I could have cut some pieces to 1 ⅛″ exactly, but if I nailed a scrap piece of ¾″ plywood to a scrap piece of ½″ plywood, that was just barely over 1 ⅛″, so this worked well.

Close up of thickness of plywood spacer block measured with tape measure

So I cut two pieces of ½″ and ¾″ plywood strips to 22″ long (my cabinet depth), nailed them together, then screwed them into the sides of my cabinets behind my face frame like you see in the image below. These will be where the drawer slides will mount to.

Once these were in, I measured the space between them to give me my width. It was 20 ¼″.

Shara Woodshop Diaries measuring cabinet width between spacer blocks installed on sides

So my cabinet organizer size should be 22″ deep x 18 ½″ tall x 19 ¼″ wide. Note that the width between spacer blocks is 20 ¼″, so you need to subtract 1″ for the drawer slides to give you the overall width of the organizer.

Learn how to measure and size drawer boxes here.

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to build a cabinet organizer pull out drawer

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

Youtube thumbnail image showing Shara Woodshop Diaries sliding cabinet organizer drawer out of base cabinet

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Circ Saw or Table Saw
  • Cutting Guides (Kreg Rip Cut and AccuCut)–optional
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Drill/Driver

Materials:

  • ½″ and ¾″ plywood* (amounts depend on size (see notes above)
  • 1″ pocket hole screws**
  • 1 ¼″ pocket hole screws
  • 1 ¼″ wood screws
  • Edge banding
  • (1) pair 22″ drawer slides*** (for installing into cabinet)
  • (1) pair 16″ drawer slides (for installing upper drawer into lower drawer)

*If you have plywood scraps, you can likely find what you need from the scrap pile.

**1″ pocket hole screws are for ½″ plywood bottom. If using ¾″ plywood for the bottom, you’d need 1 ¼″ pocket hole screws.

***Drawer slide length should match cabinet depth rounded down to nearest even number.

Step 1: Assemble main bottom drawer

I started by building the larger bottom drawer. This was essentially building a simple box, but not all the sides are the same height as you can see in the image below.

I cut ¾″ plywood so that when assembled together, like shown below, the box was 22″ deep (front to back) and 19 ¼″ wide (see notes above on how to measure your cabinets to determine your sizing).

I made the two sides taller (about 16″), the front shorter (about 6″) and the back piece somewhere in the middle (about 12″).

Shara Woodshop Diaries fitting pieces together to build cabinet organizer drawer

Of course, these are not “hard rules” on the measurements. Feel free to customize as you see fit.

I didn’t like the sharp corners on the top of the sides, so I used a circular saw and Accu-Cut guide to miter these corners.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting sides of organizer drawer with circular saw

Then, I applied edge banding to the exposed edges of the plywood just so it looked a little cleaner. Learn how to cover plywood edges here.

Once the edges were covered, I screwed the box together with wood screws at each corner.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling large bottom cabinet organizer with screws

For the bottom, I used ½″ plywood because I had some scraps, but ¾″ plywood would also work. OR, you could glue and staple a piece of ¼″ plywood onto the bottom as well.

I cut a piece of ½″ plywood to fit inside the box and installed using pocket holes and screws.

RELATED: How to use pocket holes in your DIY projects

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing cabinet organizer drawer bottom with pocket hole screws

Step 2: Install Inside Drawer Slides

Now the main drawer box is assembled, but I’m planning to place a smaller drawer box inside. So I needed to install a pair of drawer slides on the inside of this box.

(This is why I had to make the sides taller than the front and back pieces.)

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer slides into cabinet organizer on workbench

So I installed a pair of 16″ ball bearing drawer slides into this box so that the slides opened toward the back.

RELATED: How to install drawer slides

This seems kind of backwards, but the slides should open toward the back because the inside drawer will slide back into the cabinet once installed.

Step 3: Build and Install Inside Drawer

Next, I assembled basically a mini-version of the larger drawer to fit onto these drawer slides.

RELATED: How to measure and size drawer boxes

Just like the larger drawer, I cut the sides, front and back from ¾″ plywood scraps and the bottom from ½″ plywood scraps.

This box can be as shallow or as deep as you’d like, but keep in mind that once installed into the larger box, the overall height needs to be smaller than the cabinet opening so it will fit.

Shara Woodshop Diaries fitting pieces together to assemble cabinet organizer drawer for tupperware

Once the smaller drawer box was assembled, I installed the part of the drawer slide that mounts to the drawer onto the sides of this box.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer slides onto upper drawer of cabinet organizer

Then, I could slide it into the larger box from step 1. At this point, measure the total height of both boxes together and make sure it’s less than the cabinet opening (see notes above).

If it’s too tall, you can either install the slides on the small drawer box a little higher (this will lower the upper drawer). Or install the slides on the sides of the larger drawer box a little lower (this will also lower the upper drawer).

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing upper drawer into larger drawer of cabinet organizer for tupperware storage

Step 4: Install Drawer Slides into Cabinet

Now this cabinet organizer is ready to install into the cabinet. So that it will easily slide in and out, I used drawer slides to install it.

I installed a pair of 22″ ball bearing drawer slides onto the spacer blocks that I added into the cabinet when determining the size (see notes above).

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing drawer slides into base kitchen cabinet

Make sure when installing these slides that they have plenty of clearance to open and close and that they don’t interfere with the cabinet door hinges.

I removed the part of the slides that mount to the drawer box and installed these on each side of my cabinet organizer.

RELATED: How to install drawer slides

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing drawer slide to side of cabinet organizer project

Step 5: Fit Organizer into Cabinet

Then, the moment of truth–I slid the slides together into this cabinet to check the fit.

Thankfully, it worked and looked really nice and clean inside the cabinet, too!

Shara Woodshop Diaries sliding cabinet organizer drawer into base cabinet onto drawer slides

I loaded it up with all our Tupperware containers and lids and it feels so much better to have all these pieces and parts in order!

DIY cabinet organizer drawer installed into base kitchen cabinet with doors open

The top drawer conveniently slides out of the way to get into the bottom drawer.

Plywood DIY cabinet organizer drawer in base kitchen cabinet pulled out on slides with top drawer pushed back into cabinet

Then it slides back out to grab those smaller items at the top.

DIY cabinet organizer drawer in base cabinet fully extended with tupperware

Now I’m tempted to add one of these into all of my cabinets! A simple, but so practical improvement–I hope this gave you some ideas for your own kitchen!

Looking for more organization project ideas?

I hope this project gave you some inspiration for customizing your own cabinets, but if you’re still browsing for more organization ideas, here are a few of my favorites! Click on the image(s) below to see how to build each one:

DIY Pots and Pans Cabinet Organizer
DIY Countertop Hutch
Scrap Wood Desk Organizer
DIY Key Holder Organizer
Scrap Wood Key Holder Catch All

If you enjoyed this project and want to save it for later, don’t forget to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing DIY cabinet organizer drawer with top drawer that slides back into cabinet

Until next time, happy building!

DIY Kitchen Cabinet Pots and Pans Organizer

August 5, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to make a basic kitchen base cabinet a little more practical with a custom DIY cabinet organizer for pots and pans!

I don’t know about you, but it’s pretty easy for my kitchen cabinets to become a chaotic mess. When everything inside is hard to find and hard to reach, I’m already frustrated with cooking before I’ve even started.

So to save my sanity, I decided to add some simple custom organizers to a few of my cabinets.

Pots and pans in plywood cabinet organizer in kitchen cabinet

I made this one specifically for my pots, pans, and skillets, but it would work well for just about any kitchen items you want to make more easily accessible in your cabinets.

And while “life changing” seems a little dramatic for a cabinet organizer, it has been a definite improvement in our home that we benefit from daily.

So if you’re looking for an easy (practically free if you have some plywood scraps!) project to improve your home, I’m sharing how to build a simple cabinet organizer below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

This is a super quick, super simple project that you can easily complete in just an hour or two. The simple design is easy to customize to any size cabinet, but I recommend putting it into one of your bigger base cabinets, if possible.

While it can work in smaller cabinets, it may end up being a bit too small to practically store large items.

Material choices

I recommend building this from cabinet grade hardwood plywood. This is what most cabinets are built with, so it will blend in well, but it’s also strong, durable, and smooth.

Learn how to choose the best plywood for your project here.

This project can be built from entirely ¾″ plywood, entirely ½″ plywood or a combination of both. I built the one shown here using ¾″ plywood for the sides and shelves and ½″ plywood for the bottom and back panel.

Because this is highly customizable and doesn’t require a lot of lumber, I encourage you to check your scrap pile as you may be able to get everything you need from there without having to buy any lumber!

RELATED: How to build a scrap wood cart to organize scrap plywood

How to measure your cabinet

You can built this organizer to fit just about any size cabinet, so before getting started, I needed to take some careful measurements of the cabinet this is going into.

First, I measured my cabinet opening height and got about 20 ½″. So I know my organizer needs to be shorter than this–I made mine about 19 ½″ tall total.

Measuring tape measuring height of base cabinet opening

Next, I measured my cabinet depth. My cabinet has a face frame, so I measured from the back of the cabinet to the back edge of the face frame. It was a little over, but I rounded down to 22″ for some wiggle room.

Tape measure measuring cabinet depth inside cabinet

Now, this organizer will be installed onto drawer slides, and since I have a face frame, I needed to install some spacer blocks to mount my slides onto so they can slide in and out. Learn more about installing drawer slides here.

My face frame overhangs the inside of my cabinet 1 ⅛″ on both sides.

Close up of tape measure measuring face frame overhang on kitchen cabinet

I could have cut some pieces to 1 ⅛″ exactly, but if I nailed a scrap piece of ¾″ plywood to a scrap piece of ½″ plywood, that was just barely over 1 ⅛″, so this worked well.

Tape measure measuring thickness of plywood spacer block for drawer slides inside cabinet

So I cut two pieces of ½″ and ¾″ plywood strips to 22″ long (my cabinet depth), nailed them together, then screwed them into the sides of my cabinets behind my face frame like you see in the image below. These will be where the drawer slides will mount to.

Once these were in, I measured the space between them to give me my width. It was 26 ¼″.

Spacer blocks inside cabinets measuring between them

So my cabinet organizer size should be 22″ deep x 19 ½″ tall x 25 ¼″ wide. Note that the width between spacer blocks is 26 ¼″, so you need to subtract 1″ for the drawer slides to give you the overall width of the organizer.

Learn how to measure and size drawer boxes here.

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to build a pots and pans cabinet organizer

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

Youtube thumbnail with text "how to build cabinet organizers"

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Circ Saw or Table Saw
  • Cutting Guides (Kreg Rip Cut and AccuCut)–optional
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Drill/Driver

Materials:

  • ½″ and ¾″ plywood* (amounts depend on size (see notes above)
  • 1″ pocket hole screws**
  • 1 ¼″ pocket hole screws
  • 1 ¼″ wood screws
  • Edge banding
  • (1) pair drawer slides***

*If you have plywood scraps, you can likely find what you need from the scrap pile.

**1″ pocket hole screws are for ½″ plywood bottom and back panels. If using ¾″ plywood for the bottom and back, you’d need 1 ¼″ pocket hole screws.

***Drawer slide length should match cabinet depth rounded down to nearest even number.

Step 1: Assemble Bottom Drawer

To get started, I cut three pieces of ¾″ plywood to make the bottom drawer–two sides and a front. (The back will come later, so don’t worry about it yet.)

I originally cut these pieces about 8″ wide (so the bottom drawer would be 8″ tall), but once it was built, I decided that was way too tall and ended up taking it apart and trimming it down shorter.

So I’d recommend cutting these pieces about 4-5″ wide. I cut their lengths so that when put together, they were the 25 ¼″ wide and 22″ deep (see notes above on sizing).

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding up assembled bottom piece of cabinet organizer pull out

I edge banded the exposed plywood edges of these pieces and attached at the corners with 1 ¼″ wood screws.

RELATED: How to cover plywood edges

Then, I cut a piece of ½″ scrap plywood to fit between these pieces. I attached using pocket holes and screws. Learn how to use pocket holes here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing bottom panel of pots and pans pull out tray with pocket hole screws

Step 2: Install Sides and Back

Now the bottom section was together, so I needed to finish out the back. I built this pots and pans cabinet organizer to have some shelves in the back to store smaller items and lids.

In order to have something to run the shelves between, I needed to add two tall sides into this bottom drawer.

So I cut two pieces of scrap ¾″ plywood about 10″ x 19″, edge banded the exposed edges, then screwed these into the insides of my bottom drawer flush to the back edge.

Shara Woodshop Diaries screwing side panels into pots and pans cabinet organizer

You’ll notice that I mitered the front, top corners of these side pieces. That’s optional, but it kind of “softens” it a bit so it’s not a sharp corner.

Then, I cut a piece of ½″ plywood to fit between these pieces (similar to the drawer bottom in step 1) and installed using pocket holes and screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing back panel into pots and pans organizer with pocket hole screws

Step 3: Add Shelves

Next, I cut two scrap ¾″ plywood shelves to fit between the sides from step 2. I wasn’t sure how I wanted to space these out, so I brought out some of my pots and pans to kind of dry fit them together to see where I wanted to place them.

Shara Woodshop Diaries dry fitting shelves into cabinet organizer to test spacing

Once I determined where I wanted to put these shelves, I drilled pocket holes into the ends of them and installed them between the sides. I apologize it’s a little hard to see–it was difficult to get a good camera angle here.

I installed my bottom shelf with a slight tilt backwards (I thought this might help hold the lids in place), but installed my top shelf square.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing shelves between sides of cabinet organizer

Feel free to customize your spacing and shelving as desired. If you’re undecided, you could use shelf pins to install adjustable shelves instead of stationary shelves here.

RELATED: How to add adjustable shelves to any project

And this is the point that I mentioned in step 1 that I decided my bottom drawer was way too deep, so I took it apart and trimmed it down a few inches haha.

Completed pots and pans cabinet pull out organizer

Step 4: Install Drawer Slides

Now the cabinet organizer is together and all that’s left is installing it. I mentioned earlier that I had planned to install this organizer onto drawer slides.

So I installed a pair of 22″ ball bearing drawer slides onto the spacer blocks I added into the cabinet when determining the size (see notes above).

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing slides onto spacer blocks inside kitchen cabinet

Make sure when installing these slides that they have plenty of clearance to open and close and that they don’t interfere with the cabinet door hinges.

I removed the part of the slides that mount to the drawer box and installed these on each side of my cabinet organizer.

RELATED: How to install drawer slides

Close up screwing drawer slides onto side of cabinet organizer

Step 5: Fit Organizer into Cabinet

Then, the moment of truth–I slid the slides together into this cabinet to check the fit.

Thankfully, it worked and looked really nice and clean inside the cabinet, too!

Shara Woodshop Diaries sliding empty DIY cabinet organizer into cabinet to test the fit

Now it was ready to load up with all the pots, pans, skillets, and lids I could fit.

Base cabinet pots and pans wooden organizer for pots and pans installed inside cabinet

This would not only work well for pots and pans, but also dishes and other kitchen accessories, too. It can easily be modified in size to fit just about any size cabinet you have.

Shara Woodshop Diaries opening cabinet to reveal DIY pots and pans cabinet organizer on drawer slides

And it makes dinnertime a little less frustrating being able to reach in and grab what you need vs crawling inside the cabinet and digging around!

Looking for more organization project ideas?

I hope this project gave you some inspiration for customizing your own cabinets, but if you’re still browsing for more organization ideas, here are a few of my favorites! Click on the image(s) below to see how to build each one:

Scrap Wood Desk Organizer
DIY Key Holder Organizer
Scrap Wood Key Holder Catch All
DIY Shoe Organizer
Tea Box with Mug Holder
Scrap Wood Cart

If you enjoyed this project and want to save it for later, don’t forget to pin it or share it to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing cabinet with pots and pans organizer pulled out full of dishes and text "how to build a cabinet organizer"

Until next time, happy building!

DIY Umbrella Stand Side Table

August 4, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a simple outdoor side table that can double as an umbrella stand!

It’s the perfect addition to the porch or patio to give you a little shade from the sun and a handy place to set your drinks.

DIY wooden umbrella stand side table with palm leaf umbrella next to outdoor wooden sofa couch with cushions in grassy yard

Although I made it for outdoors, if you didn’t need an umbrella stand and just wanted a side table, this could work indoors, too!

This was such a quick and fun DIY scrap wood project and I’m excited to share all the details on how to build it below!

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

I was able to build this umbrella stand from various scraps I had leftover from a few previous outdoor projects. But, if you don’t have any spare wood lying around, that’s okay!

It’s a small project you can build with just a few boards (I’ve included the materials list below). It’s also a quick project you can easily tackle in an afternoon or a weekend.

While this table functions as an umbrella stand, the umbrella will still require a weighted base. This base will sit underneath the table, so you want to make sure the base you use isn’t too large to fit.

Overall Dimensions

The overall dimensions of this umbrella stand table are approximately 19″ x 19″ x 21″.

Dimensional diagram showing overall dimensions of umbrella stand side table

What Type of Wood to Use for Outdoor Furniture

You can build outdoor projects from any wood type, but some will last MUCH longer than others.

RELATED: How to shop for lumber

Untreated pine (basic construction lumber) will work fine for outdoor furniture, but is best for projects that will be under cover–like on a porch. If exposed to a lot of sun and rain, it will deteriorate quickly.

It’s the most budget friendly option, but may not be the most durable for outdoor use.

Pressure treated pine is a little more expensive, but is made specifically for outdoor use. It’s a very common material to build decks with.

It’s treated with chemicals to make it more rot resistant and will usually last SEVERAL years outdoors even if left uncovered.

While durable and budget friendly, this material is heavy, treated with chemicals and can take a while to dry out.

Pressure treated lumber on workshop floor
Pressure treated pine lumber

Cedar, red wood, and teak are all naturally decay and insect resistant wood options that look really nice.

But, these wood types can be a bit more expensive and sometimes hard to find depending on where you live. For example, I can’t get red wood where I live, but I can get cedar–so that’s what I used here.

So when building for outdoors, consider your budget, availability, and the pros and cons of each option before choosing your wood type.

Don’t forget when building outdoor projects–make sure the hardware (screws), glues and finish you use are rated for exterior use.

If building this for indoor use, cedar, pine, poplar or oak are all great options to use.

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to sand wood
  • How to choose the right screw for your project

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to build an umbrella stand side table

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional information here:

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable umbrella stand table building plans here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Drill/Driver
  • Pocket Hole Jig
  • Hole Saw and/or Forstner Bit (large enough to drill holes for umbrella post)
  • Brad Nailer (optional)

Materials:

  • (2) 2x2x8 boards
  • (1) 2x4x8 board
  • (1) 1x4x8 board
  • (1) 1x6x6 (or use 1×6 fence picket or 1×4 boards for bottom slats)
  • 1 ¼″ pocket hole screws
  • 2 ½″ pocket hole screws
  • 2″ wood screws
  • 2 ⅞″ timber screws (OR 2 ½″ – 3″ long wood screws)
  • 1 ¼″ brad nails (optional)

Step 1: Assemble the Top

To get started, I cut four pieces of scrap 2×2 cedar to 17 ½″ long. Once cut, I drilled a pocket hole into ONE END of each piece.

RELATED: How to drill pocket holes

Then, I assembled them together at the corners with pocket hole screws like shown below. Note the orientation of the pieces.

Shara Woodshop Diaries holding up 2x2 umbrella table frame assembled with pocket holes and screws

After the frame was together, I cut four pieces of scrap 1×4 cedar to fit inside the frame. I installed these using pocket holes and screws so that the pocket holes were on the bottom side and the boards were flush across the top.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing top frame slats in umbrella stand table

These slats should fit into the frame with some gaps between them. I just kind of eyeballed that the gaps looked even–they don’t have to be specific.

NOTE: Since it’s an outdoor project, it will likely be exposed to rain/snow. When water pools on wood, it can cause warping and/or other damage. So leaving gaps allows water to drain off, preventing damage.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable umbrella stand side table plans here.

Step 2: Assemble the Base

After the top was together, I cut four pieces of 2×2 cedar to 19 ½″ long and four pieces of 2×4 cedar to 16″ long.

I drilled pocket holes into the ends of the 2x4s and installed them between the 2x2s to make a table base using pocket hole screws.

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling umbrella stand table base on workbench with pocket holes and screws

I measured, marked, and installed these 2x4s so that the bottom was about 3″ up from the bottom of each 2×2 leg.

Then, I placed the top from step 1 onto this base and secured with black timber screws at each corner.

Securing umbrella stand top to table base at corners with timber screws

Because the pocket holes in the top frame run along each corner, it’s important to be careful when driving these timber screws. I recommend predrilling first to make sure you’re not drilling into a pocket hole screw. It’s also best to predrill anyway because these large timber screws can split cedar pretty easily.

By the way, the black accent of the timber screws added a little extra character, but if you don’t have any and don’t want to buy them, regular 2 ½″ or 3″ wood screws would work fine here, too.

Before moving on, I cut some scrap ¾″ x ¾″ strips to glue along the bottom supports. If you don’t have any ¾″ square scraps, 1x2s would also work–these don’t have to be a specific size.

Close up of supports added to bottom of table to hold bottom shelf slats

The bottom slats will rest on these in a later step, so I just glued them on two opposite 2x4s about ¾″ from the top. That way, when the slats are placed on them, it’ll be flush (or close to flush) across the top.

Step 3: Install Optional Side Trim

Next, I cut to fit some 2x2s to kind of “decorate” two sides. This is completely optional, but it adds some detail.

I ran these at a diagonal so that they met in the middle at the top, but you could do a full X, run them vertical, or flip them upside down if you wanted.

Once I had cut them to fit, I carefully screwed them in to the top frame.

Shara Woodshop Diaries securing side table braces with screws in workshop

Then I flipped it over and screwed them in at the bottom. The bottom is a bit trickier–I had to “toe nail” (or drive the screw in at an angle) like you see below to secure each piece.

Close up of "toenailing" screw to secure side trim

I repeated on the opposite side of the table so that two sides were open and two sides had these extra trim pieces.

All the details, dimensions, and diagrams for this build can be found in the printable umbrella stand side table plans here.

Step 4: Install Bottom Shelf

Then, I cut three pieces of 1×6 cedar fence picket to rest across the supports I glued on at the bottom. I only used cedar fence pickets here because I didn’t have enough scrap 1x4s. If you wanted to use 1x4s and match the top, you absolutely could.

I had to trim the width of one of my fence pickets to fit. So, I placed that one in the center.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing bottom slats on supports of umbrella stand table

I cut these and made sure they fit, but I didn’t secure them just yet. I wanted to make sure the umbrella would work with it before securing.

But, if you don’t plan to use this for an umbrella stand, you can nail or screw these bottom slats in place.

Step 5: Drill Holes for Umbrella & Stand

Because I was using this for an umbrella stand, I obviously had to drill holes for the umbrella pole to go into. So I used a forstner bit (a hole saw or spade bit would work, too) a little bigger than the diameter of my umbrella pole to drill a hole out in the center of the top.

Because the center of the hole is in a gap between boards, I clamped a scrap board on top to keep my bit steady. Otherwise, it would be difficult to get it started.

Drilling hole for umbrella pole in top of wooden table

Now, even though this table is an umbrella stand, you still actually need a weighted umbrella stand to go underneath it. So I measured the diameter of my weighted umbrella stand post (which is larger than the pole, so make sure you check it!).

And I drilled out a hole a little larger than the stand post in the center of my center bottom slat.

Shara Woodshop Diaries using hole saw to drill hole for umbrella base in wooden table

I know this is a little out of order, but before securing my bottom slats, I went ahead and stained them and the table separately. I applied a coat of Cabot Australian Timber Oil in Honey Teak.

Then, I placed the bottom slats back into the table and brad nailed them in place (you could also screw them if you wanted).

At that point, I test fit it over my weighted umbrella stand to make sure everything fit well.

Shara Woodshop Diaries placing umbrella stand side table over umbrella base in workshop to test fit

Thankfully, it did, so it was ready for the umbrella, a sunny day, and a glass of tea.

Shara Woodshop Diaries sitting on outdoor sofa next to umbrella stand side table with palm leaf umbrella providing shade

I love that it can double as a side table AND an umbrella stand. I intentionally built it so that it’s easy to slip over the umbrella stand, so if we ever decide to change things out, we can.

Close up of top of DIY wooden umbrella stand side table with sunflowers and iced tea

While the weighted stand is still used, the table adds a lot of extra stability…and style, of course.

Umbrella stand side table with palm leaf umbrella sitting next to outdoor sofa

Who knew some wood scraps could look this good?? If you’d like to build your own, grab the printable plans here.

Looking for More Scrap Wood DIYs?

Can’t get enough scrap wood projects?? I’m teaming up with my friend, Kati, from Houseful of Handmade all month long for “Scrap Wood Summer!”

Check out all the projects in the series below. Click on the images to learn how to make each one!

Umbrella Stand Side Table
Hanging Bird Bath
Mug Holder Shelf
Harvest Basket
Wooden Riser
Scalloped Planter
Desk Organizer
Dog Bowl Stand

This is our fourth year hosting Scrap Wood Summer and I enjoy it a little more each time. But, if you’ve never heard of it before, that’s okay!

Essentially, we each share a new scrap wood project every Tuesday throughout the month of August. So by the end of the month, you’ve got 8 new project ideas to try.

So stay tuned to see all the other fun ideas we are so excited to share with you!

Can’t wait? Check out previous Scrap Wood Summer projects plus other scrap wood ideas here.

If you’d like to save this DIY umbrella stand table for later, be sure to pin it or share to your favorite social channel!

Pinterest collage image showing Shara Woodshop Diaries with umbrella stand side table in yard at bottom and text at top "how to build an umbrella stand side table"

Until next time, friends, happy building!

DIY Armoire Cabinet with Shelves

August 2, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a DIY armoire cabinet with shelves!

You’ve probably heard it said that you can never have enough storage. And while I like to keep things minimal around my house, I still have to agree!

White and wood tall DIY armoire cabinet with double doors and decorative feet. One door open one door closed

I built this DIY armoire cabinet to be a gorgeous piece of furniture perfect for storing those not-so-gorgeous items in.

Things like mismatched bath towels, various cleaning supplies, my collection of old DVDs I just can’t seem to get rid of (or is that just me?)–these things stay neatly tucked away behind the decorative trimmed doors.

White armoire with double doors trimmed out with half round molding and black hardware accents

These types of cabinets are typically used for storing clothing and/or linens, an empty storage cabinet is fair game for storing just about anything.

I built this one with adjustable shelves, but if you wanted to hang clothes in here, simply add a hanging rod across the top and you’re good to go.

While the things inside may not be what you want on display, the storage cabinet you hide them in might as well be! I’m sharing the detailed instructions to build your own armoire storage cabinet in the post below.

*This post contains affiliate links.  Please see disclosure policy for details. 

Thanks to PureBond Plywood for supplying the plywood, D Lawless Hardware for supplying the hinges and knobs, Osborne Wood Products for supplying the decorative feet, and to Sherwin Williams for supplying the paint for this build.

**This post was originally published in June 2018, but was updated July 2025.

What to Consider Before Building a DIY Armoire Cabinet

This is an intermediate level building project. It’s assembled using basic pocket hole joinery, but the addition of the feet, trim details and the doors make this a little more involved than most beginner projects.

This cabinet was made almost entirely from plywood. I recommend using a good quality hardwood plywood for this project–something like birch, maple, or oak.

Learn how to choose the best plywood for your project here.

Birch plywood sheet leaning against workbench

What is the difference between an armoire and a wardrobe?

There are some slight differences between an “armoire” and a “wardrobe” if you want to get nit picky about it. But really, it’s just a personal preference in terminology.

You can use the terms “armoire” and “wardrobe” interchangeably to mean basically the same thing–a tall, freestanding storage cabinet. These are usually used for storing clothing, but can be used for storing other items as well.

Typically, an “armoire” is a more decorative and ornate version of a wardrobe that has more shelves and/or drawers instead of hanging rods.

Armoires usually have doors and they may have hanging rods, but it’s not the main method of storage in most cases.

Wardrobes, on the other hand, are usually more simple (less decorative), may or may not have doors, and are used mostly for hanging clothes, so the hanging rod is pretty much a necessity.

How big should an armoire be?

Armoires and wardrobe cabinets don’t have a standard specific size. However, if you do plan to hang clothes inside, the depth should be at least 20-24″ to accommodate standard sized clothing hangers.

Typical armoire cabinet widths range from 36-44″ wide and heights range from 72-78″ tall.

These are COMMON sizes, but you may find some smaller or larger.

The overall dimensions of this DIY armoire cabinet (including the crown molding at the top) are approximately 27 ¾″ deep x 44 ⅝″ wide x 69″ tall.

Overall dimensional diagram of DIY armoire cabinet-- 44 ⅝" wide, 27 ¾" deep and 69" tall

The dimensions of the cabinet box alone (not including feet, doors or crown molding) is approximately 25″ x 37 ½″ x 60″.

You may find these resources helpful during the building process:

  • How to cut plywood sheets
  • How to use a pocket hole jig
  • How to apply iron on edge banding
  • How to cut crown molidng
  • How to paint wood furniture

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to Build a DIY Armoire Cabinet

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

*Please don’t judge too harshly. This is an OLD video and things have much improved since then, I promise!

I’m sharing the plans in this post below, but if you prefer to print, you can grab the printable plans with cut list and diagrams here:

NOTE: The order of the steps below don’t match the order of the steps in the printable plans. Many of these “steps” don’t have to be done in a specific order. What is shown below is how I ACTUALLY built it. But the plans are how I would suggest building it if I were to do it again.

Tools & Materials:

Tools:

  • Circular Saw
  • Kreg Rip Cut
  • Kreg AccuCut
  • Kreg Pocket Hole Jig
  • Nailer
  • Miter Saw
  • Drill
  • Kreg Shelf Pin Jig
  • Table Saw (optional)

Materials:

  • 3 sheets ¾″ PureBond plywood
  • 1 sheet ¼″ plywood
  • (5) 1x3x8 boards
  • (1) 8′ stick of crown molding
  • (6) 8′ sticks half round molding
  • (4) scrap 2×6 blocks for the feet
  • (4) decorative feet
  • 6 hinges
  • 2 knobs
  • 2 double magnetic catches
  • Wood Glue
  • 1 ¼″ pocket hole screws
  • 2″ and 2 ½″ wood screws
  • Shelf pins
  • Edge Banding
  • Painters Tape

Step 1:  Construct the Storage Cabinet Carcass

The vast majority of this project is made from ¾″ birch plywood.  So the first thing I did was start cutting down my sheets into more manageable pieces.

I like to use my circular saw and Kreg cutting guides to cut down my plywood sheets. You can check out how I cut plywood in this post.

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting down plywood using circular saw and Kreg cutting guide

I cut one full sheet of plywood in half down the middle to give me two strips. Then I cut each strip into one long and one short piece.

These will make the main cabinet carcass. You can find the complete plywood cut diagram and cut list in the printable plans here.

Plywood storage cabinet plywood pieces cut to length--two 60" long pieces and two 36" long pieces leaning against the wall

I used pocket holes to assemble, so once my pieces were cut down, I drilled ¾″ pocket holes into the ends of the short pieces.

RELATED: How to use a pocket hole jig

pocket holes drilled into the ends of the two 36" long plywood panels

If you aren’t familiar with working with plywood, the edges are not the nicest. Plywood is made from glued together “layers” of wood, so the edges will show these various layers.

If you’re working on a project where these edges will be exposed in the end, you may want to consider covering them with edge banding.

close up image of edge banded vs no edge banded plywood panel

I like to use iron on edge banding and it’s really easy to apply. I’ll show you how to cover your plywood edges with edge banding here.

Because the front edges of this armoire cabinet box will be exposed in the end of the project, I went ahead and added edge banding to these before assembling.

The top and bottom edges of the cabinet will be covered with trim, so I only needed to apply this to the front edges of the side panels…not all four pieces.

using an iron to apply iron on edge banding to plywood panel

After sanding each piece lightly, I assembled the main cabinet box using pocket hole screws.

The top edge of the bottom should be 2 ½″ up from the bottom of the cabinet sides. I faced the pocket holes all toward the outside of the box so they’ll be hidden in the finished project.

Armoire cabinet carcass assembled in workshop

Step 2: Add Backing to Armoire Cabinet

Then, I cut a piece of ¼″ plywood to fit over the back side.   

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing back panel onto storage wardrobe cabinet box

I glued and nailed this piece onto the back side making sure everything is square. If you wanted, you could use staples or screws to secure as well.

Step 3:  Add Trim to DIY Armoire Cabinet Carcass

Now it was time to add some trim. Feel free to get creative with the trim details if you’d like to do something different for your project.

To trim out the sides, I cut to fit pieces of 1×3 to run vertically along the front and back. Then I added a piece between them at the top and the bottom.

1x3 boards nailed around sides of armoire cabinet carcass

I used wood glue and brad nails to secure these pieces on BOTH SIDES of the cabinet.

To trim out the front, I cut to fit two more pieces of 1×3 to go across the top and bottom of the front side like shown. 

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing trim pieces along top edge of cabinet

Just like the sides, I glued and brad nailed these in place.

Shara Woodshop Diaries brad nailing 1x3 trim pieces along bottom edge of cabinet

After the 1×3 trim pieces were secure, I added crown molding around the top. Learn how to cut crown molding here.

You could swap the crown molding for cove molding if you wanted something a little smaller.

I cut to fit each piece on the sides and front and attached using wood glue and brad nails.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing crown molding around top of armoire cabinet box
Crown molding installed onto cabinet on top and side

I didn’t decide until later that I wanted to add some extra trim along the bottom side, so you will see in the picture below that I already added the feet. 

But while we are on the subject of trim, it’s easiest to go ahead and add this bottom edge trim now vs. later.

Close up showing half round molding installed around bottom edge of armoire cabinet carcass

I cut to fit some half round molding to run along the bottom edge of the cabinet like shown above. This is totally optional and you could also opt for cove or another type of molding instead of half round if you’d like.

I just glued and brad nailed these pieces on the sides and front.

Prefer to print? Grab the armoire cabinet printable building plans here.

Step 4: Add Middle Shelf and Dividers to Cabinet

Since this cabinet is so wide, I wanted to make sure that the shelves would hold plenty of weight.  I also wanted to make sure the the middle of this cabinet didn’t bow outward. 

So I attached a stationary middle shelf and a middle divider support underneath it to help with holding up those heavy items.

I cut this divider from ¾″ plywood and attached using pocket holes and pocket hole screws between the side panels.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing middle divider panel into cabinet using pocket hole screws

Notice I also edge banded the front edge since it will be exposed in the finished project.

Then I added a vertical divider in the center between this shelf and the bottom of the cabinet. 

I just screwed this in using 1 ¼″ wood screws in the bottom and the top.  But you could also use pocket holes and screws if you wanted.

Plywood storage cabinet trimmed out with middle shelves added inside

Next, I used a Kreg Shelf Pin Jig to drill shelf pin holes to install adjustable shelves in the top section and the two smaller bottom sections.

Learn how to use a shelf pin jig here.

Of course, if you didn’t want adjustable shelves, you can simply cut shelves and install using pocket holes and screws.

However, I change my mind often, so I like the option to change the shelf locations as needed.

I drilled shelf pin holes along the front and back of both sides of the top half of the cabinet.

Inside of plywood cabinet with arrow pointing to shelf pin holes

Then I also drilled shelf pin holes along the front the back of both sides of the two bottom sections on each side of the divider.

This will allow me to add large adjustable shelves at the top and smaller adjustable shelves at the bottom.

RELATED: Check out this post about must cave cabinet building tools

Step 5: Add Decorative Feet to the Cabinet

There are tons of options out there for furniture feet that you could use for this. However, I picked these sofa feet from Osborne Wood Products. 

They’re decorative, but not too fancy.  Since I was painting this project, I just went with the cheapest wood option, but if you’re staining, you can pick from several wood varieties to match your project.

Now, bear with me as we attach these. It’s not difficult, but you may be wondering what I’m doing haha.

First, I attached each foot to a scrap block. This scrap block can then be attached to the cabinet.

Close up of decorative feet added to spacer blocks

I used wood glue and 2 ½″ wood screws to secure each foot to a scrap 2×4 or 2×6 block. I attached so that the edges of the foot were along two edges of the block–so in the corner.

Then, I glued and screwed these blocks into the bottom corners of the cabinet with 2″ wood screws. Be sure to predrill your holes to prevent the 2x block from splitting.

Shara Woodshop Diaries using wood screws to install spacer blocks onto bottom corner of armoire cabinet

Make sure the screws pull the blocks nice and tight to the bottom of the cabinet and don’t skip the glue!

Decorative feet installed onto bottom corners of armoire cabinet

Step 6: Prepare the Doors for the Armoire Cabinet

The doors of this armoire cabinet are cut from ¾″ plywood. So I cut a two equal size double doors to fit my cabinet.

RELATED: How to size cabinet doors

Because the sides will be exposed (they’re overlay doors), I applied edge banding around the edges of the panels.

Grab the complete cut list and diagrams in the printable plans.

When I first hung these doors to see what they would look like, I felt like it looked a little funny proportionally without having face frames down the sides of the cabinet.

So, to “fake a face frame,” I cut a dado down each door 2 ½″ from the edge about ¼″ deep on the table saw.  This mimics the look of a face frame, but still keeps the door as one solid panel.

I used a table saw for that, but you can also just use a circular saw and straight edge. Just remember to set the blade depth to only about ¼″.

You can see the cut in the image below. The doors aren’t attached yet and they kept falling forward, so I stuck this chair seat in front of them to keep them propped up for the picture. Just ignore that ha!

Plywood doors test fit onto armoire cabinet with dadoes cut for "faux face frame"

Then it was time to add the decorative molding to the doors.  This is all totally customizable.  You could use whatever kind of molding or design you wanted.

I cut half round molding to create this design.  You can play with the lengths of the pieces to get the design you like.

I cut to fit the rest of the trim and spaced everything out so it looked even and proportionate. There’s no right or wrong here. It’s just what you like the look of.

To attach, I just applied wood glue to these pieces and held them in place until it was dry using painters tape.

Plywood cabinet door laid on floor with half round molding taped in decorative design on front side
Plywood cabinet door with decorative trim installed test fit over armoire cabinet

Step 7: Finish

All that’s left at this point it to putty, sand, and finish.  I used wood filler to fill the nail holes, smooth out the joints on the trim, and fill in any knots in the wood.

I like to caulk the inside corners as well to give a smoother paint finish.

Then, I applied primer and paint. Check out this guide for how to paint raw wood furniture.

For this project, I used Sherwin Williams Premium Wall and Wood Primer and Sherwin Williams Emerald Urthane Trim Enamel in the color SW 7008 Alabaster.

Close up of Sherwin Williams Emerald paint can

I painted the cabinet and the doors separately to make things easier. So once the paint was dry, it was time to hang them.

Step 8:  Hang Doors and Add Shelves

I’d normally use concealed hinges for something like this, but due to the way these doors are mounted and the trim on the sides, concealed hinges just didn’t work for this specific application.

So I used a non mortise butt hinge instead. For this project, I used these hinges and just put one about 4″ up from the bottom and one 4″ down from the top of each door.

Then, because these doors are kind of heavy, I added a third one in the middle for extra hold. To be honest, four hinges on each door might be even better.

I installed the doors onto the cabinet so that there were even gaps at top and bottom of each door.

White painted plywood storage armoire cabinet with doors open and adjustable shelves inside

Then I added these knobs to each door and these double magnetic catches help hold the doors closed.  I placed one on the top and one on the bottom as you can see above.

Close up of armoire cabinet knobs--black knobs against white painted wood doors

And finally, I cut a shelf for the top and two shelves for the bottom sections, applied edge banding to the front edges, and placed them inside using shelf pins.

DIY wardrobe cabinet finished painted white with one door open and one closed to reveal shelves inside
Close up of bottom right corner of DIY armoire cabinet with decorative feet
Decorative armoire storage cabinet painted white with large double doors with decorative trim on front

And now it’s ready to load up with whatever you need to store away!

Prefer to print? Grab the armoire cabinet printable building plans here.

Looking for more storage cabinet ideas?

I LOVE how this turned out and it’s one of my all time favorite DIY furniture projects!

But, if you’d like more tall storage cabinet ideas and building plans to browse, here are a few favorites!

DIY Wardobe with Drawer
Small Linen Cabinet
DIY Display Cabinet
DIY Closet System
How to Build Your Own Stand Alone DIY Closet Cabinets With Clothes rod and adjustable shelves and even a shoe rack!
DIY Closet Cabinets

If you enjoyed this project, don’t forget to pin this or share to your favorite social media channel to save it for later!

How to Build a Wardrobe Storage Cabinet that looks great in any room in the house! Finished in Sherwin Williams Alabaster and made from PureBond Plywood, this gorgeous DIY piece is one you'll be proud you made yourself!

Until next time, friends, happy building!

DIY Linen Cabinet {with Glass Door!}

July 31, 2025 by Shara, Woodshop Diaries

In this post, I’m sharing how to build a beautiful tall DIY linen cabinet.

This simple cabinet packs a ton of style with the cremone bolt, the subtle trim details, and the glass door.

Shara Woodshop Diaries standing next to DIY glass door linen cabinet with cremone bolt

I built this cabinet to go in my bathroom to store away towels, toiletries, and such. But the great thing about this project is that it’s super versatile.

It could work as a display cabinet in a living room or office for keepsakes or awards. It could also work well in a bedroom for extra bedding, blankets, or even clothes.

*This post was originally published July 2019, but has been updated July 2025.

You could even build it without the door to use it as a simple, classic bookshelf. However you plan to use it, it’s a great DIY woodworking project to tackle and I’m sharing how to build it below.

*This post contains affiliate links. See website policies.

What to consider before building

I built this original cabinet almost exclusively from solid red oak boards because Weaber Lumber gifted me the lumber for this build–mostly 1×6 boards.

stack of oak lumber on concrete floor

So for the sides and back, I had to glue several boards together to make the larger panels. This was challenging, time consuming, and a bit frustrating. (I really don’t enjoy glue ups.)

That said, if I had to do this over, I would use cabinet grade plywood for the entire cabinet body instead of gluing up solid wood panels. So that’s what I’m sharing in the plans below.

If you’d prefer to glue up solid wood panels like I did originally, you totally can. Plywood is just cheaper and faster and will look just as good (if you get cabinet grade plywood).

Learn how to choose the best plywood for your project here.

Overall dimensions

The overall dimensions of this linen cabinet with glass door is approximately 28″ wide x 75″ tall x 20 ¼″ deep.

Overall dimensional diagram showing linen cabinet dimensions

Note that those measurements include the crown molding. Depending on the size and style molding used, this could vary. Cabinet dimensions without the molding are approximately 72″ tall x 23 ½″ wide x 17 ¾″ deep.

You may find these resources helpful throughout the build:

  • How to Cut Plywood
  • How to Use a Pocket Hole Jig
  • How and Why to Use the Kreg Micro Jig
  • How to Cut Crown Molding
  • How to Use a Router
  • How to Use a Dowel Jig

Are DIY projects your thing? Sign up for our newsletter for priority access to the latest projects and build plans!

How to Build a Linen Cabinet with Glass Door

If you prefer to watch, I’ve shared the full build video with tons of tips, behind the scenes, and additional details on my YouTube Channel here.

Please note: This is an old video (from 2019), so don’t judge too harshly. Much has changed and improved since then.

Love watching how-to videos? Subscribe to my YouTube channel for plenty more where that came from!

Prefer to print? Grab the printable glass door linen cabinet building plans here:

Tools & Materials

Tools:

  • Miter Saw
  • Drill/Driver
  • Circular Saw
  • Dowel Jig
  • Router
  • Brad Nailer

Materials:

  • (1) 4’x8′ sheet ¾″ plywood
  • (1) 2’x8′ (half) sheet ½″ plywood
  • (2) 2x2x8 boards
  • (7) 1x2x8 Boards
  • (1) 1x4x8 Board
  • 8′ Crown Molding
  • 8′ Base Board Molding (3 ¼″ tall)
  • Glass, Plexiglass, OR Acrylic Panel (cut to fit)
  • ⅜″ x 1 ½″ Wood Dowels
  • Wood Glue
  • (4) Non Mortise Butt Hinges
  • Large Cremone Bolt

Step 1: Assemble Linen Cabinet

Originally, I built this cabinet by gluing up three 1×6 boards to make each side panel. But, to save a lot of time and trouble, if I were to do it over, I’d cut these panels, instead, from ¾″ plywood.

Gluing up panels takes a lot of time because you have to make sure everything is aligned well, then you have to wait for the glue to dry, then you have to sand down the joints and make sure you’ve removed all the glue residue.

Shara Woodshop Diaries gluing up red oak boards into a solid panel

It’s a great option if you enjoy the process, but red oak plywood looks just as nice and is great for projects like this cabinet.

To build the cabinet, I cut two large side panels and two smaller top and bottom panels. .

Shara Woodshop Diaries cutting red oak plywood with circular saw

I used wood screws through the side panels to assemble the cabinet body in the original project (like you see below), but if I were to do it over, I’d use pocket holes and screws.

RELATED: How to use a pocket hole jig

These wood screws will be covered with trim later, so either way works fine. But if you use wood screws like shown, make sure to predrill pilot holes to prevent wood splits!

Shara Woodshop Diaries assembling DIY linen cabinet box with wood screws

Note that the bottom panel is installed about 3 ½″ up from the bottom edge of each side.

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this linen cabinet here.

Step 2: Add Back Panel

After assembling the box, I needed to add the back panel. In the original build, I glued up 1×6 boards to make a solid back panel, but again, if I were to do it over, I’d use plywood for the back panel.

Either ½″ or ¾″ plywood would work fine, but I’d recommend ½″ plywood to save a little weight and a few bucks.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing back panel onto DIY linen cabinet with glass door on workshop floor

I simply cut a panel to fit over the back of the cabinet and glued and screwed it in place.

One fun way to “dress up” this back panel and add some more interest (if you wanted to) is to “fake” shiplap by cutting shallow kerf cuts along the back panel–like I did on this DIY bookshelf.

Step 3: Trim Linen Cabinet Sides

Next, I wanted to add some extra trim on the sides to give it a little more detail. I cut to fit 1x2s to run vertically, flush to the front and back edges. I just glued and nailed these onto each side.

Then, I cut to fit 1x2s to run horizontally between them–one at the top and one in the middle.

Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing trim onto sides of linen cabinet build

At the bottom, I used a 1×4 because I wanted a “thicker” bottom to add baseboard trim around later.

Step 4: Assemble and Attach Face Frame

Now, I needed to frame out the front. I assembled a large face frame using 1x2s on the sides and top and a 1×4 toward the bottom. This face frame can be assembled with wood glue and dowels OR pocket holes and screws.

A standard size pocket hole jig can work fine, BUT, when building face frames, I recommend using a Kreg Micro Jig with pan head pocket hole screws. The smaller holes and screws are less likely to cause splits.

Learn more about how, when, and why to use the Kreg Micro Jig here.

I built this exactly the same size as the front of the cabinet so when I glued and nailed it onto the front, it was flush to the sides, top and bottom.

Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing face frame on front of linen cabinet project

All the dimensions, details, and cut diagrams can be found in the printable building plans here.

Step 5: Add Molding

Then, I cut to fit crown molding along the top and base board trim along the bottom. I just glued and brad nailed these pieces in place.

Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing crown molding around top of linen cabinet DIY project
Shara Woodshop Diaries nailing base board around bottom of DIY linen cabinet project

RELATED: How to cut crown molding

Step 6: Build The Door

I wanted the door to be 1 ½” thick, so I used 2x2s for the door frame. But I wanted this door to have “panes” so I built a divider to sit inside the frame. I made the divider using 1x2s turned on their edge.

I had planned to use an ⅛″ thick glass panel in this door and I wanted it to sit inside the back of the frame. So I ripped ⅛″ off my 1×2 pieces (this made them 1 ⅜″ wide), and assembled the divider using wood glue and dowels.

Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling dowel holes to assemble glass door divider panes
Shara Woodshop Diaries clamping 1x2s together to assemble glass door divider panel

While that dried, I cut my 2×2 pieces to fit around the divider to make the door frame. I used a rabbeting bit to cut an ⅛” deep rabbet along the inside of these 2×2 door frame pieces. 

This way, once it’s all assembled, there will be an ⅛” recess in the whole back of the door for the glass panel to fit into.

Shara Woodshop Diaries routing rabbet on back side of door frame pieces

Then, I attached the 2×2 frame along the divider.  The divider should be flush to the front edge of the 2x2s and flush to the ⅛″ rabbet on the back side (that’s why I ripped the 1x2s to 1 ⅜″ wide before assembling).

Shara Woodshop Diaries dry fitting door frame together on workbench

I used wood glue and dowels to CAREFULLY attach the frame together at the corners and attach the divider to the frame.

RELATED: How to use a dowel jig

Shara Woodshop Diaries drilling dowel holes to assemble door frame for glass door linen cabinet

To add a little extra detail to the door, once the glue was dry, I used a Roman Ogee router bit to add a decorative edge around the openings on the front side.

Shara Woodshop Diaries using trim router to add decorative edge around glass door openings

Then I gave the entire cabinet and the door a nice natural finish using Walrus Oil Furniture finish and wax.

Shara Woodshop Diaries applying clear oil finish to red oak linen cabinet

Prefer to print? Grab the printable building plans for this linen cabinet here.

Step 7: Install the Door

I attached four non mortise cabinet butt hinges along the door and installed it onto the cabinet making sure to leave ⅛″ gaps around all sides.

Close up of installing butt hinges to attach linen cabinet door

NOTE: Concealed hinges are usually my go to choice for cabinet doors, but they don’t work well for doors this thick. (Standard concealed hinges are for doors ~¾″ thick.) In this case, simple butt hinges are the easiest option, but pivot hinges could also work if you wanted something less visible.

I also drilled shelf pin holes with my Kreg Shelf Pin Jig for the adjustable shelves inside the cabinet. Learn how to add adjustable shelves to any project here.

Then, I installed a large cremone bolt to be able to secure the door. You could use another type of hardware, knob, or pull, instead, but the cremone bolt was a fun visual detail.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing cremone bolt to linen cabinet door

Step 8: Add Glass Panel

Now, I needed to add the glass into the door. I had a local glass shop custom cut a piece of ⅛″ glass to fit into the rabbet on my door. But, if I were to build this again, I’d opt for plexiglass or acrylic instead of real glass because it’s less likely to break, but also much lighter.

Before gluing it in place, I cleaned it well with a glass cleaner.  Then I applied some clear Gorilla Glue along the inside of the door frame and along the dividers and carefully set the glass in place.

Shara Woodshop Diaries installing glass panel into door frame on linen cabinet

The glue alone held well, once dry, but I’d recommend also adding some mirror brackets, picture frame turn tabs or other type of clips around the back side to secure it.

Then, to wrap it all up, I added some shelf pins and placed the shelves inside and it was finished. 

Finished DIY linen cabinet with glass door and cremone bolt--door half open to show inside shelves

I’m so excited with how this turned out. The door was a challenge, but it really makes this piece pop!

If you’d like to build one yourself, be sure to check out the printable building plans here.

Shara Woodshop Diaries opening linen cabinet door
DIY Red oak linen cabinet with crown molding, baseboard trim, and a glass door
Close up of cremone bolt on DIY linen cabinet built

Looking for more storage cabinet project ideas?

If you enjoyed this project, but still looking for more ideas, check out these awesome DIY storage cabinet projects as well. Click on the image(s) below to see how to build each one.

How to Build a Pantry Cabinet
Mudroom Built Ins
Sliding Door Storage Cabinet
DIY Display Cabinet
DIY Closet System
DIY Wardobe with Drawer
DIY Armoire Cabinet
How to Build a Larder Cabinet

If you’d like to save this project for later, don’t forget to pin it or share to your favorite social platform!

Pinterest collage image showing close up of linen cabinet cremone bolt at top and completed linen cabinet with glass door at bottom with text "how to build a linen cabinet"

Until next time, friend, happy building!

  • 1
  • 2
  • 3
  • …
  • 16
  • Next Page »

Hi! I'm Shara, the designer, maker, and videographer behind Woodshop Diaries. Let's get building, friends :)

Learn more →

Woodworking Tips & Guides

  • How to make simple Shaker style cabinet doors!!
    DIY Simple Shaker Cabinet Doors
  • 5 Tools To Get Started Woodworking
  • DIY Kitchen Cabinets–From Only Plywood
  • How to Square Board Edges and Make Your Own 2x2s

Footer

↑ back to top

Tips to Take Your Projects to the Next Level

--5 Secrets to Professional Looking DIY Furniture

--How to Properly Paint Wood Furniture

--How to EASILY Cover Plywood Edges

--How to Sand Wood

--10 Must Have Tools for Furniture and Cabinet Building

Printable Building Plans

Check out our shop to browse printable PDF building plans!

Website Policies

This website is for entertainment purposes. Using any information provided is to be at your own risk.

This site uses cookies to provide you with a better experience.

All images and text on this site are property of Woodshop Diaries, LLC. Please be respectful and don't steal this content.

See Policies and Privacy page on this site for more information.

Want to get in touch? Contact Us Here

Copyright © 2026